Samsung Telephone Dcs 408 Users Manual Programming_v2_

DCS-408 to the manual 913553d6-cc7c-47b9-a9bb-b91db5847c6e

2015-01-23

: Samsung Samsung-Samsung-Telephone-Dcs-408-Users-Manual-283182 samsung-samsung-telephone-dcs-408-users-manual-283182 samsung pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 276

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SAMSUNG
DCS
COMBINED
PROGRAMMING
MANUAL
for
DCS
DCS COMPACT
DCS COMPACT II
DCS-816
DCS-408
DCS-408i

Publication Information
Samsung Telecoms reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this publication for any reason.
Samsung Telecoms also reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in
design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant.

Disclaimer
Samsung Telecoms is not responsible for errors or problems arising from customers
not installing, programming or operating their Samsung systems as described in this
manual.

Copyright 2001
Samsung Telecoms (UK) Limited
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any
means – graphic, electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopy or
information retrieval system – without express written permission of the publisher of
this material.

Part No.:12623

Version 2.0

EU Declaration of Conformity
For other directives relevant to DCS Compact II, DCS-816, DCS-408 and DCS-408i systems,
refer to the Samsung website at:
www.samsung-telecoms.co.uk

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

CONTENTS
NOVEMBER 2001

Contents
Part
1

Introduction to Programming .....................................1–1
1.1

Using this Manual...........................................................................1–1

1.2

Programming Overview..................................................................1–2

1.3

Programming Levels ......................................................................1–2
1.3.1 System Level ............................................................................ 1–2
1.3.2 Customer Level......................................................................... 1–2
1.3.3 Station Level ............................................................................. 1–3

1.4

Keys Used for Programming..........................................................1–3
1.4.1 Soft Keys.................................................................................. 1–3
1.4.2 Other Keys ............................................................................... 1–3

1.5

Programming Procedures..............................................................1–4
1.5.1 Precautions When Programming ............................................... 1–4
1.5.2 Opening System or Customer Level Programming ..................... 1–4
1.5.3 Opening Station Level Programming .......................................... 1–5
1.5.4 Programming DCS-408 and 408i Systems.................................. 1–5

Program (MMC) List and Default Data ......................2–1
2.1

Program (MMC) List .......................................................................2–1

2.2

Default Data....................................................................................2–3

2.3

System Configuration: Quick Reference ...................................... 2–9

Special Applications ....................................................3–1
Voice Mail / Auto Attendant Integration...................................................3–2
Individual Station Page............................................................................3–4
CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)........................................3–5
Toll Restriction (Call Barring) Overview...................................................3–6
S0 Overview.............................................................................................3–8

MMCs (in numerical order) ........................................4–1

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

INTRODUCTION
NOVEMBER 2001

Part 1. Introduction to Programming
This manual describes the MMC programming required for the following types of Samsung DCS keyphone system:
•
•
•
•
•
•

DCS
DCS Compact (Compact I)
DCS Compact II
DCS-816
DCS-408
DCS-408i.

In this manual, these systems are referred to as “DCS,” “Compact I (CI),” “Compact II
(CII)," "816," "408" and “408i” respectively. Programming requirements for these system
types are generally the same, but occasionally there are differences. Users of 408 and
408i systems should also read Programming DCS-408 and 408i Systems in section 1.5.4
of this manual. Unless otherwise stated, references to “DCS” include Compact I systems.
The different system types are discussed fully in the separate Samsung General Description manuals for each system, where these have been published.
Software Version Numbers
The software version numbers of the systems for which this programming manual is
relevant are: DCS and Compact II=V6.10 or later; 816=V1.09 or later; 408 and
408i=1.04 or later.

1.1 Using This Manual
•

It is recommended that you read the whole of Part 1 of this manual which provides a
useful overview to MMC programming procedures.

•

For a comprehensive list of available MMCs, see Part 2.

•

For quick reference, Part 2 also provides a table listing the default settings for each
MMC and indicating which systems can use each MMC. A “Y” (“Yes”) in the appropriate column indicates that it can be used for that system.

•

To quickly check allowed configuration settings for each type of system—number of
trunk group members, card port numbers, and so on—see section 2.3 System Configuration: Quick Reference in Part 2.

•

To begin programming, refer to the appropriate MMC(s) in Part 4. Check the selected MMC header bar to make sure the program is available on your system, if
you haven’t already done so.

•

Refer to Part 3, Special Applications, for further information on voice mail / auto attendant integration, individual station paging, CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation), toll restriction (call barring) and S0 programming.
1-1

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

INTRODUCTION
NOVEMBER 2001

1.2 Programming Overview
When the keyphone system arrives from the factory it contains default data. This needs
to be customised, using the MMC programs, to suit the customer’s requirements.
MMC stands for Man Machine Code and each MMC is assigned a three-digit code (100,
101, and so on). These MMCs are used to view, create or change customer data on a
display keyphone (called KMMC programming). For example, MMC 601 is used to create a station group; system speed dial numbers are entered in MMC 705; key functions
are assigned to individual keyphones (or “keysets”) using MMC 722; and system dialling codes (such as extension numbers and feature codes) can be changed in MMC
724.

1.3 Programming Levels
There are three levels of programming: System level, Customer level and Station level.
System and Customer levels allow system-wide programming and are under passcode
protection to restrict access. System programming is done by the system installer (or
system technician), usually on a one-off basis, but also to manage any changes in the
customer’s requirements. Customer programming is done by the system administrator,
on a day to day basis, to manage station users’ requirements. Station level programming does not require a passcode, allowing station users to make simple changes to
their keyset features.
To preven t conflicting data from being entered, only one person at a time can enter System or Customer programming. If you attempt to enter programming mode while another keyset is being used for programming, your display shows [xxx PGM MODE]
where “xxx” is the keyset extension number of the station in programming mode. While
programming is in progress, normal system operation is not affected.

1.3.1 System Level

This level is entered via MMC 800 and requires the installer’s (technician’s) passcode.
This is the highest level and allows access to all system programs, station programs
and maintenance programs. The installer (sometimes called the installing technician)
also decides which programs are accessible to the customer (the system administrator)
at Customer level.

•

All MMCs are accessible at this level.

1.3.2 Customer Level

This level is entered via MMC 200 and requires the customer’s passcode. It allows access to station programs and system programs permitted by the system installer in
MMC 802. When the system administrator uses the customer passcode to access station programs, data for all stations can be viewed or changed. Changes can be made
either system-wide or to selected keysets. (The system administrator should also refer
to the System Administration manual for their keyphone system if this is available.)

•

Accessible MMCs at this level are designated by the installer.
1-2

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

INTRODUCTION
NOVEMBER 2001

1.3.3 Station Level

The system administrator or keyset user can access certain programs at a station without using a passcode. At this level, only data for the selected station can be changed.
You should refer to the instructions provided in the Samsung DCS Keyset User Guide.
•

Accessible MMCs at this level are nos. 100–121.

1.4 Keys Used for Programming
Programming may be done from any 6-button (6B), 12-button (12B) or 24-button (24B)
keyset with a liquid crystal display (LCD). (Refer to the Samsung DCS Keyset User Guide
for a full description of keyset operation.)

1.4.1 Soft Keys
The three keys directly below
the LCD are called soft keys.
The left-hand soft key is designated as the LEFT soft key. This
key is used to save any
changed data while programming, or to move the cursor to
the left on the LCD.
The right-hand soft key is designated as the RIGHT soft key.
This key is used to save any
changed data while programming, or to move the cursor to
the right on the LCD.
DCS Euro Display Keysets

1.4.2 Other Keys
The following keys perform special functions:
VOLUME UP (+) / DOWN (–)
KEYPAD
HOLD
ANS/RLS
SPEAKER
TRSF

Scroll up/down through available options*
Enter data using keys 0–9 and [, and dial options*
Clear previous entry
Select “ALL” option (e.g. to make data apply to all,
rather than selected, stations)
Store data and advance to next MMC
Enter programming mode or
Store data and exit programming mode

* Note: Many MMCs allow you to dial codes using the keypad to select options quickly. Alternatively, you can press the VOLUME Up and Down keys (+ and – ) to scroll through and select options. Use whichever method you prefer.

1-3

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

INTRODUCTION
NOVEMBER 2001

The 6, 12 or 24 extra programmable keys can be set up to perform specific functions
when pressed during normal operation. During programming, some of these keys also
perform other specific functions. This is described in the individual MMC program procedure where applicable.

1.5 Programming Procedures
1.5.1 Precautions When Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The keyset must be on-hook (handset down) to allow programming.
Programming is available on any digital keyset with an LCD.
Programming is available only on digital telephones (not analogue ones).
If ‘INVALID DATA’ appears in the LCD while programming, you should re-enter the
correct data.
When you have successfully completed an entry, the LCD automatically changes for
the next step.
Programming halts if you have not pressed a key for a certain period of time (30 seconds by default, but this can be changed).
Programming halts if you pick up the handset while programming.
If you pick up the handset while programming, or the telephone plug is pulled out,
any new data shown in the LCD are saved.

IMPORTANT

When installing and programming a ‘default’ system
for the first time:
The system requires that you select the correct software version for your country
(e.g. by selecting “UK”) before you can do any other programming via either a keyphone (KMMC programming) or a PC (PCMMC programming).
To select the country:
1. Press the TRSF key.
2. Enter 800 followed by the default passcode (4321)
The system sounds a warning and displays on the keyset:
ENABLE TECH. PROG
SELECT COUNTRY

Use the VOLUME Up/Down keys to select the country and press the RIGHT soft key.
The keyset displays:
DEFAULTING SYSTM
ARE YOU SURE? NO

Use the VOLUME Up/Down keys to select YES and press the RIGHT soft key. When
defaulted to the correct version, you can open programming as described next. The
country version selected can be changed in MMC 812, Select Country.

1-4

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

INTRODUCTION
NOVEMBER 2001

1.5.2 Opening System or Customer Programming
To open programming:
1. Press the TRSF key.
2. Enter the MMC program number 200 (for Customer level programming) or 800 (for
System level programming).
3. Enter the relevant passcode.
4. Press key 1 (or use the VOLUME Up or Down key) to select ‘ENABLE’.
5. Press the SPEAKER key to have the program selection mode appear (or press the
TRSF key to halt programming).
6. Enter the MMC number, or select the program number with the Up or Down key and
press the SPEAKER key.
When opening system programming, you are advised to check MMC 812 (Select Country) to ensure that the correct country has been selected before you do any other programming.
Carefully follow the instructions given with each MMC to program your system correctly.

1.5.3 Opening Station Level Programming
To open programming:
1. Press the TRSF key.
2. Enter the MMC program number.
Carefully follow the instructions given with each MMC to program your system correctly.

1.5.4 Programming DCS-408 and 408i Systems
Although physically similar in appearance, the “408” and “408i” are different systems and
may have different programming requirements and features. For example, the 408i supports ISDN whereas the 408 does not. Thus, an MMC relevant to one system may not be
relevant to the other. Similarly, where an MMC relates to both systems, some features
available on the 408i system may not be available on the 408 system, and vice versa.
This will be indicated in the MMC description, where appropriate.
These systems also differ significantly from all other keyphone systems, both in size and
physical appearance. In comparison with other systems, when programming your 408 or
408i:
•

Extension, group and trunk numbers are two digits by default (e.g. extension 21,
trunk 71, etc). All other systems use 3-digit numbers by default (e.g. extension 201,
trunk 701, etc).* Examples of programming shown in this manual use 3-digit numbers for convenience only.
(*Unless changed by the system installer in MMC 724.)

•

You can set up to four ‘Normal’ station groups. Group types AA, VM/AA and UCD
are not permitted.

•

Only two trunk groups, 8 and 9, are available. (All other systems support groups 9
and 80–82.)
1-5

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC LIST
NOVEMBER 2001

Part 2. Program MMC List & Default Data
2.1 Program (MMC) List
100:
101:
102:
103:
104:
105:
106:
107:
108:
109:
110:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
116:
119:
121:
200:
201:
202:
203:
204:
205:
206:
207:
208:
209:
210:
211:
212:
213:
214:
215:
216:
217:
219:
220:
300:
301:
302:
303:
304:
305:
306:
308:
309:
310:
311:
312:
313:
314:
315:
316:

STATION LOCK
CHANGE USER PASSCODE
CALL FORWARD
SET ANSWER MODE
STATION NAME
STATION SPEED DIAL
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
KEY EXTENDER
STATION STATUS
DATE DISPLAY
STATION ON/OFF
KEYSET RING TONE
ALARM REMINDER
VIEW MEMO NUMBER
STATION VOLUME
SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
ALARM AND MESSAGE
SET CLIP DISPLAY
KEYSET LANGUAGE
OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
ASSIGN UA DEVICE
COMMON BELL CONTROL
ASSIGN LOUD BELL
BARGE-IN TYPE
ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
ASSIGN RING TYPE
ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
CUSTOMER ON/OFF
DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
ALARM RINGING STATION
ALARM MESSAGE
DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS
VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS
CCC OPTION
COMMON RELAY SERVICE TYPE
ISDN SERVICE TYPE
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
ASSIGN STATION COS
PICKUP GROUPS
ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
ASSIGN STATION/TRUNK USE
ASSIGN FORCED CODE
HOT LINE
ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
ASSIGN SIM PARAMETER
ALLOW CLIP
ASSIGN PIN CODE
CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL
SET RELOCATION
COPY STATION USABLE

317:
318:
319:
400:
401:
402:
403:
404:
405:
406:
407:
408:
409:
410:
411:
412:
414:
415:
416:
417:
418:
419:
420:
421:
422:
423:
424:
426:
427:
428:
500:
501:
502:
503:
504:
505:
506:
507:
508:
509:
510:
511:
512:
600:
601:
602:
603:
604:
605:
606:
607:
608:
700:
701:
702:

2-1

ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
DISTINCTIVE RING
BRANCH GROUP
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
CO/PBX LINE
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
TRUNK NAME
TRUNK NUMBER
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE
TRUNK STATUS READ
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
MPD/PRS SIGNAL
REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
ASSIGN AC15 TRANSLATION
PRI CRC4 OPTION
CARD RESTART
BRI OPTION
PRI OPTION
MSN DIGIT
ASSIGN TRUNK COS
S/T MODE
S0 MAPPING
TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
R2MFC SIGNAL
ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS
STATION-WIDE TIMERS
TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS
PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
TONE CADENCE
ASSIGN AUTO NIGHT TIME
CALL COST
C.O. TONE CADENCE
SLI RING CADENCE
MW LAMP CAD
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
STATION GROUP NAME
ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
UCD OPTIONS
ASSIGN CLIP REVIEW BLOCK
COPY COS CONTENTS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
TOLL DENY TABLE

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
703:
704:
705:
706:
707:
708:
709:
710:
711:
712:
713:
714:
715:
716:
717:
718:
720:
721:
722:
723:
724:
725:
726:
727:
728:
730:
731:
732:
733:
734:
735:

MMC LIST
NOVEMBER 2001

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
AUTHORISATION CODE
ACCOUNT CODE
PBX ACCESS CODE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
DDI NUMBER & NAME TRANSLATION
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
UK LCR OPTION
PIN CODE
MY AREA CODE
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
SMDR OPTIONS
VM/AA OPTIONS
SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
CLIP TRANSLATION TABLE
AA RECORD GAIN
AA RAM CLEAR
AA TRANSLATION TABLE
AA PLAN TABLE
AA MESSAGE MATCH
AA USE TABLE

736:
737:
738:
739:
740:
741:
742:
743:
744:
745:
750:
751:
752:
753:
754:
755:
756:
757:
800:
801:
802:
803:
804:
805:
806:
807:
808:
809:
810:
811:
812:

2-2

ASSIGN AA MOH
DECT SYSTEM CODE
DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
BSI DOWNLOAD
STATION PAIR
BSI CARD RESTART
BSI STATUS
DECT BASE STATION (DBS) STATUS
DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
BSI CARRIER
VM CARD RESTART
ASSIGN MAILBOX
AUTO RECORD
WARNING DESTINATION
VM HALT
VM ALARM
ASSIGN VM MOH
VM IN/OUT
ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER
TX LEVEL & GAIN
CARD PRE-INSTALL
VOLUME CONTROL
T1 TRUNK CODING
SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE
HALT PROCESSING
RESET SYSTEM
SELECT COUNTRY

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

DEFAULT DATA
NOVEMBER 2001

2.2 Default Data
Station Programs
DCS

CII

816

408

408i

100:

STATION LOCK

ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED

101:

CHANGE USER PASSCODE

ALL STATION PASCODES=1234

102:

CALL FO RWARD

ALL STATION=0 (FWD CANCEL)

103:

SET ANSWER MODE

ALL KEYSETS ‘RING’
RING FREQUENCY DEFAULT=5

104:

STATION NAME

NONE

105:

STATION SPEED DIAL

NONE

106:

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

NONE

107:

KEY EXTENDER

NONE

108:

STATION STATUS

SEE MMC 108

109:

DATE DISPLAY

COUNTRY: WESTERN
CLOCK: 24-HOUR
DISPLAY: LOWERCASE

110:

STATION ON/OFF

AUTO HOLD: OFF
AUTO TIMER: ON
HEADSET MODE: OFF
HOT KEYPAD: ON
KEY TONE: ON
PAGE REJOIN: ON
RING PREFERENCE: ON
CALL COST: OFF
AME BGM: OFF
AME PSWD: OFF

111:

KEYSET RING TONE

SELECTION=5

112:

ALARM REMINDER

ALARMS SET TO NOTSET

113:

VIEW MEMO NUMBER

NO MEMOS ENTERED

114:

STATION VOLUME

RING VOL: 4
OFF HOOK RING VOL: 4
HANDSET VOL: 4
SPEAKER VOL: 13
BGM VOL: 13

115:

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

NO MESSAGES SELECTED

116:

ALARM AND MESSAGE

ALARMS SET TO NOTSET

119:

SET DISPLAY

NAME FIRST

121:

KEYSET LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

2-3

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

DEFAULT DATA
NOVEMBER 2001

System Programs
DCS

CII

816

408

408i

200:

OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

CLOSED (DISABLED)

201:

CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

PASSCODE =1234

202:

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES

DAY/NIGHT=0000
DISA ALARM=5678
ALARM CLR=8765
AA RECORD=4321
DECT (BSI) REGISTER =4321

203:

ASSIGN UA DEVICE

NONE

204:

COMMON BELL CONTROL

CONTINUOUS

205:

ASSIGN LOUD BELL

UNASSIGNED

206:

BARGE-IN TYPE

NO BARGE IN

207:

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

NORMAL PORT

208:

ASSIGN RING TYPE

ICM RING

209:

ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE

NONE FOR MASTER

210:

CUSTOMER ON/OFF

SEE MMC 210

211:

DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

STATION GROUP 500 (or 50)

212:

ALARM RINGING STATION

ALL SENSORS RING 500
DAY/NIGHT

213:

ALARM MESSAGE

NONE

214:

DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

DAY/NIGHT=500 (or 50)

215:

VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS

2CH-7USER-20BIN

216:

VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS

NONE

217:

CCC OPTION

NONE

219:

COMMON RELAY SERVICE TYPE

SEE MMC 219

220:

ISDN SERVICE TYPE

VOICE

300:

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

STN CALL PRT : OFF
FWD DLY USE : OFF
OTHER FEATURES SET TO
ON

301:

ASSIGN STATION COS

DAY CLASS = 1
NIGHT CLASS = 1

302:

PICKUP GROUPS

ALL STATIONS GROUP 1

303:

ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

NONE

304:

ASSIGN STATION/TRUNK USE

DIAL = YES
ANS = YES

305:

ASSIGN FORCED CODE

NONE

306:

HOT LINE

NONE

308:

ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC
SOURCE

NONE

309:

ASSIGN STATION MUSIC ON HOLD

NONE

310:

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

LEAST COST ROUTING
COS 1

2-4

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

DEFAULT DATA
NOVEMBER 2001
DCS

CII

816

408

408i

311:

ASSIGN SIM PARAMETER

SIM TYPE = DTE
CALL MODE = MANUAL
ANS MODE = MANUAL
AUTO BAUD = ON
DTR CHECK = ON
ECHO = ON
PROTOCOL = V110
SPEED = 9600
CHAR LENGTH = 8 BITS
PARITY = NONE
STOP BIT = 1

312:

ALLOW CLIP

RCV=YES, SEND=YES,
INFO=CO Tel

313:

ASSIGN PIN CODE

ALL STATIONS ARE CODE
#1

314:

CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

NONE

315:

SET RELOCATION

NONE

316:

COPY STATION USABLE

NONE

317:

ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

DIAL=YES

318:

DISTINCTIVE RING

T=F-STN, C=F-STN

319:

BRANCH GROUP

–

NOT USED IN UK

400:

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

1A2 EMULATE: OFF
TRUNK INC DND: OFF
TRUNK FORWARD: ON
LCR ALLOW:OFF

401:

C.O./PBX LINE

ALL TRUNKS C.O. LINE

402:

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

ALL TRUNKS DTMF

403:

TRUNK TOLL CLASS

ALL TRUNKS F-STN
DAY/NIGHT

404:

TRUNK NAME

NO NAMES ENTERED

405:

TRUNK NUMBER

NO NUMBERS ENTERED

406:

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

ALL TRUNKS DAY/NIGHT:
500 (or 50)

407:

FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

NONE

408:

ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD
SOURCE

TONE

409:

TRUNK STATUS READ

SEE MMC 409

410:

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

ALL TRUNKS NORMAL

411:

ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE

–

NOT USED IN UK

412:

ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE

414:

MPD/PRS SIGNAL

NONE

415:

REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

REPORT=YES

416:

ASSIGN AC15 TRANSLATION

UNUSE DID TRANS

417:

PRI CRC4 OPTION

CRC4 ON

418:

CARD RESTART

NONE

2-5

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

DEFAULT DATA
NOVEMBER 2001
DCS

CII

816

408

408i

419:

BRI OPTION

CHANNEL ANY: YES
BRI MODE: P-P DDI
DLSEND: OVERLAP
BRI CODING: A-LAW
POWERFEED: NO

420:

PRI OPTION

CHANNEL ANY: YES
PRI MODE: DDI
DLSEND: OVERLAP

421:

MSN DIGIT

NONE

422:

ASSIGN TRUNK COS

DAY CLASS: 1
NIGHT CLASS: 1

423:

S/T MODE

TRUNK

424:

S0 MAPPING

NONE

426:

TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

RX=+0.0 dB, TX=+0.0 dB
(ALL TRUNKS)

427:

R2MFC SIGNAL

NOT USED IN UK

428:

ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

DIAL=YES

500:

SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

SEE MMC 500

501:

SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS

SEE TABLE OF TIMERS
AND VALUES IN MMC 501

502:

STATION-WIDE TIMERS

NO ANS FWD: 015 SEC
DTMF DURATION: 100 MS
FIRST DGT DELAY: 600 MS

503:

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

ANS.BAK TM: 600 MS
CLEARING: 002 SEC
CO SUPV TM: 400 MS
DTMF DURATION: 100 MS
FIRST DGT DELAY: 600 MS
FLASH TIME: 070 MS
NO RING TM: 004 SEC
PAUSE TIME: 003 SEC
PRS DET TM: 000 MS
RNG DET.TM: 300 MS
WINK: 200 MS
MF/DP INT TM: 0800 MS
MFR DLY TM: 000 SEC

504:

PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

MAKE/BREAK = 33
PULSES PER SECOND = 10

505:

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

FOLLOWS S/W VERSION
RELEASE DATE

506:

TONE CADENCE

SEE MMC 506

507:

ASSIGN AUTO NIGHT TIME

NONE

508:

CALL COST

UNIT COST PER MP: 200
PENCE
CALL COST RATE: 100%

509:

C.O. TONE CADENCE

SEE MMC 509

510:

SLI RING CADENCE

SEE MMC 510

511:

MW LAMP CAD

ON: 1000MS, OFF: 1000MS

512:

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

NONE

600:

ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

DAY/NIGHT: 500 (or 50)

2-6

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

DEFAULT DATA
NOVEMBER 2001
DCS

CII

816

408

408i

601:

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

SEE MMC 601

602:

STATION GROUP NAME

NONE

603:

ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

SEE MMC 603

604:

ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

NO STATIONS ASSIGNED
’ALL ZONE’ IS SET

605:

ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

NONE

606:

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

SYSTEM: SEE MMC 606
STATIONS: ONE BIN OF 10
ENTRIES

607:

UCD OPTIONS

SEE MMC 607

608:

ASSIGN CLIP REVIEW BLOCK

ONE BIN OF 10 ENTRIES

700:

COPY COS CONTENTS

NONE

701:

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

TOLL LEVEL: ALL COS=A
ALL FEATURES (EXCL.
OVERRIDE)=YES

702:

TOLL DENY TABLE

ALL ENTRIES=0

703:

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

ALL ENTRIES=0

704:

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

ALL X, Y, Z=1

705:

ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

NONE

706:

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

NO NAMES

707:

AUTHORISATION CODE

NONE

708:

ACCOUNT CODE

NONE

709:

PBX ACCESS CODE

NONE

710:

LCR DIGIT TABLE

DEPENDS ON S/W VERSION

711:

LCR TIME TABLE

SEE MMC 711

712:

LCR ROUTE TABLE

SEE MMC 712

713:

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

DEPENDS ON S/W VERSION

714:

DDI NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

SEE MMC 714

715:

PROGRAMMED STATION
MESSAGE

20 MESSAGES (10 PREPROGRAMMED) (SEE MMC
715)

716:

UK LCR OPTIONS

SEE MMC 716

717:

PIN CODE

NONE

718:

MY AREA CODE

–

NOT USED IN UK

720:

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

NONE

721:

SAVE STATION KEY PRO GRAMMING

RESTORE

722:

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

SEE MMC 722

723:

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

SEE MMC 723

724:

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

SEE MMC 724

725:

SMDR OPTIONS

SEE MMC 725

726:

VM/AA OPTIONS

SEE MMC 726

2-7

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

DEFAULT DATA
NOVEMBER 2001
DCS

CII

816

408

408i

727:

SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

INSTALLED CARD VERSIONS

728:

CLIP TRANSLATION TABLE

NONE

730:

AA RECORD GAIN

+0.0 dB

731:

AA RAM CLEAR

NONE

732:

AA TRANSLATION TABLE

SEE MMC 732

733:

AA PLAN TABLE

SEE MMC 733

734:

AA MESSAGE MATCH

MSG INDEX NO.

735:

AA USE TABLE

PLAN 01

736:

ASSIGN AA MOH

NOT USE

737:

DECT SYSTEM CODE

AUTH CODE: FFFF
SYSTEM ID: 000

738:

DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION

FORCED MODE

739:

BSI DOWNLOAD

NONE

740:

STATION PAIR

NONE

741:

BSI CARD RESTART

NONE

742:

BSI STATUS

NONE

743:

DBS STATUS

NONE

744:

DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF

DISABLE

745:

BSI CARRIER

1111111111

750:

VM CARD RESTART

DOWNLOAD=YES

751:

ASSIGN MAILBOX

ALL STN=YES, ALL GRP=NO

752:

AUTO RECORD

MB=NONE, PORT=NONE
CALL=I

753:

WARNING DESTINATION

DEST=500

754:

VM HALT

NONE

755:

VM ALARM

THRESHOLD=80%

756:

ASSIGN VM MOH

NOT USE

757:

VM IN/OUT

IN/OUT

800:

ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

DISABLE

801:

CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

DEFAULT PASSCODE = 4321

802:

CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NO.

SEE MMC 802

803:

ASSIGN TENANT GROUP

ALL ASSIGNMENTS TENANT 1

804:

SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER

SEE MMC 804

805:

TX LEVEL AND GAIN

SEE MMC 805

806:

CARD PRE-INSTALL

NONE

807:

VOLUME CONTROL

SEE MMC 807

808:

T1 TRUNK CODING

–

NOT USED IN UK

809:

SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

810:

HALT PROCESSING

NONE

811:

RESET SYSTEM

NONE

812:

SELECT COUNTRY

NONE

2-8

2.3 System Configuration: Quick Reference
Description

DCS

Compact I

Compact II

816

408

408i

3951–8

3951–6

381–6 1

381–4

N/A

AA Translation tables 1 & 2 (entries)

100

N/A

Account codes

500

250

200

100

Authorisation codes

250

100

BGM port numbers

3701–2

371–2

371

Classes of Service (COS)

CLIP Translation Table entries

250

200

N/A

100

Daughterboards (keyset)

KSU

Any DLI port

Motherboard

None

DDI entries

200

N/A

DECT ports

N/A

LCR Digit Table (max. entries)

500

300

100

3701–2

371–2

371

Operator Group members (sequential / distributed ring)

Operator Group members (unconditional
ring)

Page zones (no. of internal)

Page zones (no. of external)

Pickup Groups

S0 bus ports

None

AA card port numbers

CALL keys (max.)

2-9

MOH port numbers
Operator Groups (part of Sta tion Group)

2.3 System Configuration: Quick Reference (cont’d)
Description

DCS

Compact I

Compact II

816

408

408i

Speed dials (total)

1500

500

600

500

300

Speed dials (system)(max.)

500

300

200

Station Groups (number of)

Station Group members (sequential / distributed ring)

Station Group members (unconditional
ring)

500–529

500–519

500–509

50–53

Trunk Groups (number of)

Trunk Group members

Trunk Group numbers

9, 80–89

9, 80–82

9, 8

N/A

Station Group numbers

2-10

UCD Groups
Voice dial card port numbers

3551–2

355–6

Notes:
1

Misc 2 card=381–4, AA card=381–6, both cards installed=381–90
UCD Group can be created from any Station Group 501–529 (CI) or last 10 Station Groups 520–529 (DCS)
3
UCD Group can only be created from last 10 Station Groups 510–519
4
UCD Group can only be created from last three Station Groups 507–509
2

N/A

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

Part 3. Special Applications
Part 3 provides additional information covering the following topics:
•

Voice Mail / Auto Attendant Integration

•

Individual Station Page

•

CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)

•

Toll Restriction (Call Barring) Overview

•

S0 Overview

3-1

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

Voice Mail/Auto Attendant Integration
(In-Band / SMDI )
This section focuses mainly on in -band integration. Systems may alternatively accommodate Bellcore standard SMDI—available by setting in MMC 210 (SMDI VMS SET option).
Because of the increased popularity of voice mail and auto attendant use, all DCS systems
include many programmable options to address this demand. The degree of integration
that can be achieved depends on the abilities of the voice mail/auto attendant (VM/AA) system as well as the telephone system.
The following describes the capabilities provided by systems for voice mail via in-band integration.

Hardware Provisions
•

The VM/AA system must be connected to single line circuits on any SLI card.

•

Each port is equipped with a dedicated DTMF receiver for detecting DTMF signalling
from the VM/AA.

•

These ports also provide an instant break in loop current when the calling party
hangs up. This is called a disconnect signal.

Software Provisions
•

Screened Or Unscreened Transfer
There are no special codes needed to transfer a call. Simply hookflash, receive
transfer dial tone and dial the destination.

•

Direct In Lines
Any C.O. call can be assigned to ring at an individual station or a station hunt group
assigned to the VM/AA.

•

Calls or Recalls to the Operator
Dialling 0 will always result in a ringback signal. If the operator is busy, the call continues to ring in queue to the operator.

•

Message Waiting
A VM/AA port can leave a message at any station or group of stations. The message
waiting indication can be set or cancelled at any station or station group with or without the stations ringing.

3–2

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

In-Band Signalling
Systems can be programmed to send the calling station’s extension number after
the voice mail system answers. These DTMF signals may include a leading digit to
indicate the type of call and additional information about the original caller. DTMF
signals may also be substituted for call progress tones to speed up voice mail call
processing. This program allows call forwarding to a mailbox and bypassing of the
main greeting for automatic message retrieval. Blind (unscreened) transfers may be
performed because the recall will be correctly identified.
Note: The effectiveness of this program depends on the ability of the voice mail system to
make use of this information.

•

Station Hunt Group With Overflow
Each station group can have an individual overflow destination with an individual
overflow timer. The overflow destination will ring whenever a call to the group is not
answered. If the voice mail system becomes inoperative, calls are automatically
routed to the overflow destination.

•

Internal Call Forwarding to Voice Mail
This option in MMC 300 provides the ability to allow or den y call forwarding of internal calls to voice mail. This feature conserves disk drive space by only storing calls
originating outside the system.

•

One-Touch Voice Mail Access
One-touch speed dial keys can be programmed to automatically dial, log into and retrieve messages from voice mail.

•

Call Progress Tones
The only tones sent to a VM/AA port are dial tone, busy and ringback. To eliminate
confusion, busy tone is substituted for DND or error tones on voice mail ports only.

3–3

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

Individual Station Page
Keyphone systems were not designed to permit page announcements to individual keysets.
However, a forced auto answer key (FAUTO) can be used to do this.
1. Program a keyset for RING in MMC 103.
2. Assign a FAUTO key (in MMC 722) to each keyset that is allowed to page individual
keysets.
3. Call another station. When you hear ringback tone, press the FAUTO key. The ringing
will stop and an Auto Answer call is set up.
Note: To prevent the use of this feature from getting out of control, only assign FAUTO keys to those
keysets needing to page individual keysets.

3–4

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

CLIP
(Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Hardware Provisions
ISDN trunk cards.

Software Provisions
The MMCs related to CLIP are listed below with a short description of their uses. They are listed
in the recommended order in which they should be programmed. This sequence is suggested
so that the installer/technician gets a better understanding of how the feature works. There is no
technical reason to strictly follow this sequence.
l

MMC 312
(ALLOW CLIP)

Used to determine which keysets are allowed to receive CLIP displays.

MMCs 722 and 723
(STATION & SYSTEM KEY
PROGRAMMING)

It is strongly recommended that all keysets allowed
CLIP in MMC 312 are programmed with a CLIP key
using this MMC.

MMC 728
(CLIP TRANSLATION TABLE)

Allows for the creation of a list of names that correspond to numbers received from the Central Office
(C.O.). These names will be displayed when a call
rings in that has NUMBER ONLY data provided by the
C.O.

MMC 725
(SMDR OPTIONS)

Provides the ability to print CLIP data and abandoned
calls on the Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) report.

MMC 119
(SET CLIP DISPLAY)

Station users can determine what CLIP data is displayed when a call rings at the user’s station.

MMC 501
(SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS)

You may need to adjust the CLIP DISPLAY timer. This
is the length of time that CLIP data is displayed at users’ stations after the CLIP key is pressed.

MMC 415
(REPORT TRUNK ABANDON
DATA)

Used to determine which trunks will record data in the
Call Abandon list and print with an Abandon “A” flag
on the SMDR report.

MMC 608
Used to assign CLIP Review blocks to keysets to al(ASSIGN CLIP REVIEW BLOCK) low the user to review CLIP data for previous calls.

MMC 701
(ASSIGN COS CONTENTS)

All CLIP features are included in this MMC so that the
system installer can allow or deny them.

MMC 724
(DIAL NUMBERING PLAN)

CLIP features are included in this MMC to allow the
system installer to assign an access code where necessary.

3–5

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

Toll Restriction (Call Barring)
Overview
The system allows each station to be assigned a class of service (COS) for day and night
modes. Into this COS is brought the dialling restrictions to be applied to each station. Dialling restrictions are applied in MMC 702 (Toll Deny Table) and MMC 703 (Toll Allowance
Table).
Eight levels of restriction are available to stations: A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H. Level A imposes no restrictions on station dialling; level H restricts stations to internal calls only; and
levels B to G are programmable. In addition, the Wild Card Table (MMC 704) can be used to
provide more flexibility when programming.

Toll Restriction Rules
• The Deny Table entries prevent certain numbers being dialled.
• The Allowance Table entries are the ONLY exceptions to the Deny Table entries.
• Listing codes in the Allowance Table with no entries in the Deny Table gives “no
restriction”.
• A wild card in any position in the Deny Table means an exception exists in the Allowance Table for the digits defined by the wild card.
• A wild card at the end of an entry means that more digits may be dialled.
• Never put a single wild card as an entry in the Allowance Table.
• When changing an entry in the BCDEFG status, ALL digits must be entered.

Use of Deny Table
Example
Let’s assume that you want to restrict (bar) the dialling of the following codes to your users:
0860 and 0850 car phone numbers, 0891and 0898 premium rate numbers, 00 International
numbers and 01 STD numbers. You would set up the Deny Table as follows:
ENTRY
001
002
003
004
005
006

TOLL DENY TABLE
DIGITS
0860
0850
0891
0898
00
01

B
1
1
1
1
1
1

C
0
0
1
1
1
0

D
0
0
1
1
0
0

E
0
0
1
1
0
1

F
0
0
0
0
0
0

Note: The number of entries allowed varies between systems (see MMC 702).

From the above table (“1” means a number is barred):
•
•
•
•

Stations with Toll Level B applied will be barred all the codes listed.
Stations with Toll Level C applied will be barred 0891, 0898 and 00 calls.
Stations with Toll Level D applied will be barred 0891 and 0898 calls.
Stations with Toll Level E applied will be barred 0891, 0898 and 01 calls.
3–6

G
0
0
0
0
0
0

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

• Stations with Toll Levels F or G applied will have no restrictions.

Use of Wild Cards and the Allowance Table
The Wild Card Table in MMC 704 appears as follows.
WILD CARD
X
Y
Z

0
0
0
0

1
0
0
0

2
0
0
0

3
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

6
0
0
0

7
0
0
0

8
0
0
0

9
0
0
0

*
0
0
0

#
0
0
0

The digits 0–9, * and # are values that each of the wild cards X, Y and Z can take. This is
explained later. (You are also unlikely to use any wild card apart from X.)
In the Deny Table, the STD code 01 has been barred to users with a B or E Toll level. It may,
however, be necessary to allow some STD codes to be dialled. For example, the codes
01869, 01993, and 01235 are codes local to Oxford and you may want users in the Oxford
area to have access to these codes, with all other STD codes barred. You can achieve this
using the Wild Card Table and Toll Allowance Table as follows:
Delete entry 006 in the Deny Table and add the following entry:
TOLL DENY TABLE
DIGITS
01XXX

ENTRY
006

B
1

C
1

D
1

E
1

F
0

G
0

and in the Toll Allowance Table make the following entries:
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
DIGITS
01869
01993
01235

ENTRY
001
002
003

B
1
1
1

C
1
1
1

D
1
1
1

E
1
1
1

F
0
0
0

G
0
0
0

In the above table, any station assigned a Toll level B, C, D or E will be allowed to dial only
01869, 01993 and 01235 numbers, but all other STD codes will be barred. Stations with a
Toll level F or G will be barred from dialling all STD codes.
The changes necessary in the Wild Card Table to implement these requirements are shown
below, where the Wild Card character X represents any value between 0 and 9 (i.e. a “1” is
placed in the field for any value that X is allowed to represent).
WILD CARD
X
Y
Z

0
1
0
0

1
1
0
0

2
1
0
0

3
1
0
0

4
1
0
0

3–7

5
1
0
0

6
1
0
0

7
1
0
0

8
1
0
0

9
1
0
0

#
0
0
0

*
0
0
0

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

S0 Overview
Contents
Introduction ..................................................................... 3–9
Specifications .................................................................. 3–9
PRI ............................................................................ 3–9
BRI ............................................................................ 3–9
ISDN Services .......................................................... 3–10
Installation ...................................................................... 3–12
Operation ....................................................................... 3–12
Ports ....................................................................... 3–12
PRI and BRI LT-T Mode ............................................ 3–13
BRI LT-S Mode .........................................................3–13
Features Reference Tables ............................................. 3–14
Related Timers ......................................................... 3–14
PRI and BRI LT-T Port ............................................... 3–14
PRI and BRI LT-S Port ............................................... 3–16
Pin Assignment of Connectors ....................................... 3–16
PRI .......................................................................... 3–16
BRI .......................................................................... 3–16
BRI Related MMC Procedure .......................................... 3–18

3–8

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

Introduction
In the DCS there are two line cards for ISDN. One is the PRI card containing one Primary
Rate Interface; the other is the BRIN card containing four Basic Rate Interfaces. For Compact (I and II) and 816 systems there are two types of BRI card, one with two BRI access,
the other with four.
The following topics are covered:
Hardware specification of each card
Installation
Operation
ISDN features supported
Note:

1. This document is based on BRI and PRI V2.0 (Nov 4 1996) or later. Therefore, some features are not applicable to the old version.
2. Main CPU software versions required are 4.0 or later (DCS), 2.3 or later (CII), 1.02 or later
(816).

Specifications
PRI
(The PRI option is not applicable to Compact I, 816 or 408/408i systems.)
The card has the following configuration:
Contains one PRI access with RJ-45 interface having 120Ω line termination.
Operates in LT-T mode only. You can only connect to a PSTN ISDN Network Termination
Port (NT).

BRI
The different types of BRI card are shown in Table 1.
System

Card name

DCS

BRIN
BRI (old)
4BRI
2BRI
4BRI
2BRI

Compact II
Compact I &
816

Number of
BRI access
4
4
4
2
4
2

Power feeding
to S port
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO

Table 1 - BRI cards
Note: The only difference between these cards is the number of access, and power feeding capability.

3–9

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

Each BRI / BRIN access has the following features:
Each port operates in either LT-T or LT-S mode. Every setting is done by MMC - there is
no jumper or DIP switch to set. You can connect an NT line or ISDN terminals. (See note,
below.)
For LT-S ports, you can decide whether or not power is supplied to that port by MMC
419.
32 numbers (DCS—range 7801 to 7832) or 24 numbers (Compact II—range 7801 to
7824) are reserved for terminals attached to the LT-S ports. Each number can be assigned to only one port. However, a port can have more than one number. (That is, two
ISDN terminals with the same MSN number cannot exist in different LT-S ports.)
Each S0 bus must be terminated with a 100Ω termination resistor. The original BRI cards
did not have this resistor. However, it is fitted to cards manufactured from mid 1997. It is
important that this termination is present on each installation, and should be checked by
the installer.
Note:

1. In BRI, LT-T and LT-S mode can be selected only by MMC programming. However, you
should connect the Tx and Rx cable pair from the MDF correctly. Tx and Rx connections are
reversed between LT-T and LT-S mode (see Table 15).
2. If you are connecting a T0 port to an NT, take care if there is a termination present somewhere other than on the BRI card on the bus.

ISDN Services
Outgoing calls when origination party is non-S0 terminal
When an extension seizes an ISDN TRK or S0 terminal attached to the system, the ISDN
bearer capability (BC) and high layer compatibility (HLC) will be coded as in Table 2.
ORIGINATION
DGP (Digital keyphone)
SLT (ICM/CO ring in MMC 208)
SLT (DATA ring in MMC 208)

BC
Speech
3.1 kHz Audio
3.1 kHz Audio

HLC
Telephony
Telephony
Telephony

Table 2 - Coding of BC/HLC when an extension seizes an
ISDN TRK or S0 terminal

Incoming calls when destination party is non-S0 terminal
When an incoming call is present on the ISDN TRK or S0 port, the call will be accepted if the
following condition is satisfied (Table 3). Calls with other BC or HLC will be rejected.

3–10

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

BC
Speech

HLC
Telephony

3.1 kHz Audio
3.1 kHz Audio

Telephony
None

3.1 kHz Audio

Fax G2/3

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

DESTINATION
DGP (Digital keyphone)
SLT (ICM/CO ring in MMC 208)
SLT (ICM/CO ring in MMC 208)
DGP
SLT (ICM/CO ring in MMC 208)
SLT (DATA ring in MMC 208)

Table 3 - Accepted BC and HLC when destination is a non-S0 terminal

Accepted BC and HLC combinations on the ISDN TRK or S0 port
For calls between S0 and ISDN TRK, the following BC and HLC combinations (Table 4) will
be accepted, regardless of which party is the originator.
BC
Speech
3.1 kHz Audio
3.1 kHz Audio
3.1 kHz Audio
Unrestricted Digital Info
Unrestricted Digital Info
Unrestricted Digital Info
Unrestricted Digital Info
Unrestricted Digital Info
56 kHz Data
V.110
V.120
Video
7 kHz Audio
Unrestricted Digital Info

HLC
Telephony
Telephony
none
Fax G2/3
none
Teletex
OSI
Video New
Mixed
none
none
none
none
none
Fax G4

LLC
A-law
A-law
A-law
A-law
none
none
none
none
none
none
proper value
proper value
none
none
Fax G4

Table 4 - Accepted BC and HLC when destination is a non-S0 terminal

Supported bearer capability
Speech, Unrestricted Data, 3.1 kHz Audio, 7 kHz Audio, Video
Supported high layer compatibility
Telephony, G3 Fax, G4 Fax, Mixed Mode, Teletex, Videotex, Telex, OSI.

3–11

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

Supported ISDN supplementary services

Service

Note

DDI
MSN
CLIP
Sub Addressing

PRI DDI Mode and BRI T P-P DDI
BRI T P-M MSN
Incoming call and outgoing call
Sub-address of incoming / outgoing call
ETSI AOC-D Currency/Unit
ETSI AOC-E Currency/Unit
Italy
Holland
Portugal
Belgium

AOC

Table 5 – Supported ISDN supplementary services

Installation
The installation procedure is as follows:
1) Switch off the power to the system.
2) Insert the card in the appropriate slot.
3) Execute MMC 811 (Reset System).
4) Carry out related MMC programming according to your intended use of the card.
5) Run MMC 418 (Card Restart).
Note:
§

In DCS, both BRI and PRI must be installed in the Basic Key Service Unit (not the Expansion
Cabinet).

The PRI card must be installed in the first slot with the next even-numbered slot empty.

100Ω line termination may not be present on the BRI card. If not, termination should be provided
somewhere outside the BRI card.

In BRI, LT-T and LT-S mode can be selected only by MMC programming. However, you should
connect the Tx and Rx cable pair from MDF correctly. Tx and Rx connections are reversed between LT-T and LT-S mode (see Table 15).

Operation
Ports
After installation, the system allocates a port number to each B-channel in exactly the same
way as the analogue trunk case. Thus, a BRI will be assigned eight port numbers, while a
PRI will be assigned 30.
Note: To avoid confusion, the words "port" and "access" are used here with different meanings. "Port"
is used to specify one B-channel, while "access" specifies one BRI span which consists of two Bchannels and one D-channel.

3–12

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

PRI & BRI LT-T Mode
Making an outgoing call
Overlap sending
You can seize a port by dialling the port number (e.g. 701). When you see SETUP ACK displayed on your keyset, you can dial the destination number.
Enblock sending
You can make a call through the enblock sending mode port by dialling the port number
and the destination number followed by #.
Incoming call routing
This depends on the mode of BRI/PRI set by MMC 419/420. See Table 6.
Operational mode
PRI NOR
BRI P-P NOR
BRI P-M NOR
PRI DDI
BRI P-P DDI
BRI P-M NOR

Associated table
MMC 406
"TRK RING"

Note
This table has global meaning applied to the ports set to DDI

MMC 712
"DDI TABLE"
MMC 421
"MSN DIGIT"

Same as above
A table is required for each BRI
access

Table 6 - Incoming call routing according to MMC 419/420

BRI LT-S Mode
Note: All of the following examples are valid only after programming with the appropriate MMC. Refer
to Part 4 of this manual.
Making a call from a DCS subscriber (DGP/SLT) to an ISDN terminal attached to LT-S port

To call a terminal attached to an LT-S port, dial the MSN of the terminal. If a terminal with
MSN of 7803 is attached to 703, and you dialled 7803, a SETUP message will be sent out
through 703 with calling party number of 7803. All terminals with MSN of 7803 will alert.
Alternatively, to call a terminal (or terminals), dial the port number. This time the calling
party number of the SETUP message is vacant. All the terminals attached to that port will
alert, with no regard to MSN number.
In the above cases, dial is always sent in enblock mode.
Caution
When making a call from an S0 terminal, take care with the CLI number. It is usually sent when
the call is made, and if that number is not registered in MMC 424 the system will disconnect
the call.
Making a call from a terminal attached to LT-S

port to a DCS subscriber (DGP/SLT)

To call a DCS subscriber from an ISDN terminal, dial the number you want to call. It is of no
concern to the BRI card whether the terminal sends the number in enblock or overlap
mode.
Making a call from a terminal attached to LT-S port to a remote terminal through a TRK

Dial the TRK number followed by the destination number. ISDN TRK and analogue TRK operate in the same way as seen from a terminal. When calling through an ISDN TRK there

3–13

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

is no relationship or restriction between the dial sending mode of the terminal and the ISDN
TRK. (DATA calls must use an ISDN TRK.)
Routing an incoming call to the terminals attached to LT-S port

Incoming calls are routed according to the properties of the selected TRK. Routing is controlled by the MMC tables. You can put a terminal number into the DDI, MSN or TRUNK
RING table as a destination, with or without a wild card digit. You can then answer the incoming call from the terminal.

Features Reference Tables
Tables 7 and 8 explain briefly which system features are applicable to ISDN cards.

Related Timers
Feature
ATT Recall Time

Implemented
YES

C.O. - C.O. Disconnect
Dial Pass Time
DISA Disconnect
DISA Lock Out Timer
DISA Pass Check
First Digit Time
Inter Digit Time
Overlap Inter Digit

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

YES

Note
You can check the version of BRI or
PRI
Only for analogue trunk
Only for analogue trunk
Only for analogue trunk
Only for analogue trunk
Only for analogue trunk

Inter Digit time in overlap sending/receiving

Table 7 – Related DCS timers
Note: These values can be changed in MMC 501 or 503.

PRI and BRI LT -T Port
Call feature capability
Feature
Transfer

Implemented
NO

Note
Transfer to remote user through ISDN TRK is
not allowed
Conference with remote user through ISDN
TRK
External Forward - forward to remote user
through ISDN TRK
SMDR report of the calls through ISDN TRK
port

Conference

YES

Forward

YES

SMDR

YES

Toll Check

YES

Toll check through ISDN TRK port

DISA

YES

Use an ISDN TRK as DISA outgoing line

Table 8 - Call feature abilities of PRI & BRI LT-T

3–14

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

MMC dependency
MMC
MMC 403 Trunk Toll Class
MMC 404 Trunk Name
MMC 404 Trunk Number

Related
YES
NO
NO

MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment

YES

MMC 407 Forced Trunk Release
MMC 408 Assign Trunk Music On
Hold Source
MMC 409 Trunk Status Read

YES
YES

MMC 410 Assign DISA Trunk
MMC 411 E1TRK Signal
MMC 412 Assign Trunk Signal
MMC 414 MPD/PRS Signal
MMC 415 Report Trunk Abandon
Data
MMC 416 Assign AC15 Translation
MMC 417 PRI CRC4 Option
MMC 418 Card Restart
MMC 419 BRI Option
MMC 420 PRI Option
MMC 421 MSN Digit
MMC 422 Assign Trunk COS
MMC 423 S/T Mode
MMC 424 S0 Mapping
MMC 508 Call Cost
MMC 509 C.O. Tone Cadence
MMC 603 Assign Trunk Group
MMC 702 Toll Deny Table
MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table
MMC 714 DDI Table

YES
NO
NO
NO
YES

YES

NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES

Note

For an outgoing call, if there is no
matching number in the DDI table this
number will be used as calling party
number
PRI Mode: NOR
BRI Mode: P-P NOR, P-M NOR

Displays the Cabinet / Slot / Port numbers

Only for AC15
Analogue only
Only for AC15
Restarts PRI or BRI

BRI Mode: P-M MSN
Only for BRI
Only for BRI S port
Only for Analogue trunk

PRI: DDI
BRI: P-P DDI

Table 9 – MMC dependency

3–15

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

PRI and BRI LT -S Port
Call feature capability
For LT-S ports, only basic call functions are provided - you cannot use other functions
(transfer, forward, hold etc) from an LT-S terminal. However, a DGP can transfer/forward a
call to an LT-S terminal. Other features (conference, hold etc) operate in a similar way.
There is no COS check for an LT-S port.

Pin Assignment of Connectors
PRI
PRI card has one RJ-45 connector with the pin assignments shown in Table10.
Pin Number
1
2
4
5

Assignment
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx

Table 10 - Pin assignments of RJ-45 at customer premises side for PRI

BRI
Champ connector
DCS
Function
Tx of P1
Rx of P1
Tx of P2
Rx of P2
Tx of P3
Rx of P3
Tx of P4
Rx of P4

Colour
W/BL
W/O
W/BR
W/SL
R/O
R/GR
R/SL
BK/BL

Colour
BL/W
O/W
BR/W
SL/W
O/R
GR/R
SL/R
BL/BK

Function
Tx of P1
Rx of P1
Tx of P2
Rx of P2
Tx of P3
Rx of P3
Tx of P4
Rx of P4

Table 11 - Champ connector pin assignment
(DCS)
Note: Tx and Rx has no polarity.

3–16

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

Compact I
Function
Tx of P1
Rx of P1
Tx of P2
Rx of P2
Tx of P3
Rx of P3
Tx of P4
Rx of P4

Colour
W/BL
W/O
W/GR
W/BR
W/SL
R/BL
R/O
R/GR

Colour
BL/W
O/W
GR/W
BR/W
SL/W
BL/R
O/R
GR/R

Function
Tx of P1
Rx of P1
Tx of P2
Rx of P2
Tx of P3
Rx of P3
Tx of P4
Rx of P4

Table 12 - Champ connector pin assignment
(Compact I)
Note: Table 12 is based on expansion slot 1 of Compact I. Tx and Rx has no polarity.

Compact II
Function
Tx of P1
Rx of P1
Tx of P2
Rx of P2
Tx of P3
Rx of P3
Tx of P4
Rx of P4

Colour
SL/P
BR/P
GR/P
O/P
BL/P
SL/Y
BR/Y
GR/Y

Colour
P/SL
P/BR
P/GR
P/O
P/BL
Y/SL
Y/BR
Y/GR

Function
Tx of P1
Rx of P1
Tx of P2
Rx of P2
Tx of P3
Rx of P3
Tx of P4
Rx of P4

Table 13 - Champ connector pin assignment
(Compact II)
Note: Table 13 is based on expansion slot 1 of Compact II. Tx and Rx has no polarity.

816
Function
Tx of P1
Rx of P1
Tx of P2
Rx of P2
Tx of P3
Rx of P3
Tx of P4
Rx of P4

Colour
W/GR
W/BR
W/SL
R/BL
R/O
R/GR
R/BR
R/SL

Colour
GR/W
BR/W
SL/W
BL/R
O/R
GR/R
BR/R
SL/R

Function
Tx of P1
Rx of P1
Tx of P2
Rx of P2
Tx of P3
Rx of P3
Tx of P4
Rx of P4

Table 14 - Champ connector pin assignment
(816)
Note: Tx and Rx has no polarity.

3–17

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

RJ-45 pin assignment for BRI
User Side (LT-T)
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx

Pin Number
3
4
5
6

NT Side (LT-S)
Rx
Tx
Tx
Rx

Table 15 - Pin assignment of RJ-45 for BRI
Note: DCS-408 and 408i users should refer to the Installation Manual provided with their system for
details of pin connections for BRI.

Making an RJ-45 connector extension to BRI
As shown in Table 15, LT-S (NT side) and LT-T (User side) have different pin assignments in
RJ-45. You can use the pin assignment tables (11–14) with Table 15 according to the function of the BRI port. You should connect pins with the pins in Table 15 that have the same
name.
Note: RJ-45 sockets come in different styles which look similar. However, pin numbers may be terminated in different places. Therefore, always check the pin numbers on your connectors.

BRI Related MMC Procedure
There are several MMCs related to BRI cards. Because some MMCs have dependencies on
other MMCs, it could become cumbersome to do MMC programming correctly. You should,
therefore, program these MMCs in a pre-defined order, as described in this section. Be sure
to follow this order, or some of the MMC data will be lost.

3–18

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

Order of Programming
Carry out programming as shown in the diagram, below.
MMC 423
S/T mode

MMC 424
S0 Mapping (NOTE 1)

MMC 419
BRI-TRK (NOTE 2)

MMC 419
BRI-STN (NOTE 2)

MMC 421
MSN Digit (NOTE 3)

MMC 418
Card Restart

Program MSN in your
ISDN terminal (NOTE 4)

Note:
1. This item does not have to be programmed prior to MMC 419 or MMC 418 (because those MMCs
have no effect on this item). However, this item must be preceded by MMC 423.
2. This item displays its name as "BRI-TRK" or "BRI-STN" according to the port setting in MMC 423.
3. This item is only applicable when a BRI access is programmed as P-MP MSN in MMC 419.
4. Only for a STATION port set in MMC 423.

Example of programming a STATION port
Assume that you have a BRI card installed in DCS and its ports are numbered from 701 to
708. You want to use the 4th BRI access (707 and 708) as a STATION port to connect ISDN
terminals. The procedure is:

3–19

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOVEMBER 2001

Select the functional mode of that port as STATION in MMC 423 (S/T Mode). You
can set either 707 or 708 to STATION.
Choose whether you want to supply power to that BRI access or not. If you do, set
the POWER FEED option to YES in MMC 419.
Restart the BRI card by executing MMC 418 (Card Restart) so that th e changes you
made can take effect.
Program MMC 424 (S0 Mapping) to map an ISDN number into a port. You must also
input the "mapped number" as MSN to the ISDN terminals connected to that BRI access. If you mapped 7807 into 707, you must set the MSN of the terminals connected to 707 (or 708) to 7807.
Now, if you dial 7807 from a keyphone (DGP), a SETUP message will be sent out
through 707 (or 708) with the called party number of 7807. There can be a number
of terminals connected to 707 (or 708) but only terminals with MSN of 7807 will alert.
Alternatively, if you dial 707 (or 708) from a DGP, SETUP message will be sent out
through 707 (or 708) without the called party number. All terminals connected to 707
(or 708) will alert.

BRI Access
In MMCs 419, 421, 423 and 424, which are related to BRI cards, you can see the "port"
number displayed as "7x(x)". Each port stands for a B-channel. Thus, two adjacent ports
make up a BRI access. You need only change the settings for one of the two ports for that
BRI access.
For example, you may see port 709 and 710 are displayed respectively in the MMCs, but
these ports are for the same BRI access. If you change settings for 709 you also change
settings for 710, and vice versa.

3–20

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Part 4. MMC Programs
This part contains all the MMC programs provided for your keyphone system, presented in
numerical order.
•

The procedure described here for a particular MMC may be slightly different on your
system and some LCD displays may not be exactly as shown. For example, port
numbers may be different for the system you are programming. Refer to the section
System Configuration: Quick Reference in Part 1 for the relevant options for your system.
Also, 408 and 408i systems employ 2-digit extension and group numbers by default,
unlike other systems which use 3-digit numbers by default. (These dialling number
plans can be changed by the system installer using MMC 724.)
Remember that the displays shown for each MMC in this manual are provided
as examples, and should be used for guidance only.

•

To identify which MMCs apply to your system, either refer to the MMC lists at the
beginning of this manual, or locate the relevant MMC page here and refer to the tick
box beneath the title: a tick (3) next to the system name indicates it is applicable; a
cross (7) means it is not.

•

The procedure described for each MMC assumes you are the installer or system
administrator with system-wide access via a passcode. However, MMCs 100–121
are also accessible to individual keyset users. If you are programming your own
keyset at Station level, the procedure is different and you should refer to your Samsung DCS Keyset User Guide for details.

•

The term “DCS” as used in this manual includes Compact I systems, except where
otherwise indicated.

•

Make sure the correct country is first selected (MMC 812) before carrying out any
other programming.

4–1

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MC: 100
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

STATION LOCK

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to lock or unlock an individual station or all stations simultaneously. The three options are:
0
1

UNLOCKED
LOCKED OUT

LOCKED ALL

Unlocks a locked station.
Prevents the station from accessing a C.O. line and initiating an external call
Prevents the station from initiating any actions.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 100
Display shows

[201] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Use UP and DOWN to select station
and use RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all stations

[205] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED

Enter 0 to unlock, 1 to lock out or 2 to lock all (e.g., 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make
selection and press RIGHT soft key
to return to step 2

[205] STN LOCK
LOCKED OUT

Press TRSF to save and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to save and advance
to next MMC

Default Data:

All stations unlocked

Related Items:

Station user programming

MMC 100 (Page 1 of 1)

[ALL] STN LOCK
??

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 101
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CHANGE USER PASSCODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to reset keyset passcodes to their default value of “1234.” This
MMC cannot display station passcodes; it can only reset them to default.
The passcode is used to lock or unlock the keyset for toll restriction (call barring) override and to
access the DISA feature.
Note:
Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override, DISA access or the walking class of service
function.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 101
Display shows

[ 201] PASSCODE
PASSCODE: Q Q Q Q

Dial keyset number (e.g., 205)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through keyset numbers
and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor right

[205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE: Q Q Q Q

Press HOLD to reset passcode

[ 205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE : 1234

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All station passcodes = 1234

Related Items:

MMC 100 Station Lock

MMC 101 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 102
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CALL FORWARD
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for station users. Also
allows call forwarding to be set after the destination has been entered.
The system allows five types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL, FORWARD BUSY, FORWARD
NO ANSWER, and FORWARD EXTERNAL. The FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER option allows
both BUSY and NO ANSWER options to be activated at the same time, provided that destinations have already been entered for both.
0 = FORWARD CANCEL
1 = ALL CALL
2 = BUSY

3 = NO ANSWER
4 = BUSY/NO ANSWER
5 = EXT (External)

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 102
Display shows

[201] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL

Dial 0–5 to select forward type
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select forward type and
press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:NONE

Dial destination number (e.g., 201)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select destination and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:201

Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO
and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[205] FORWARD
CURENTLY SET :YES

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance
to next MMC

MMC 102 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Default Data:

All stations 0 (Forward Cancel)

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

301
501
502
701
722
723

Assign Station COS
System-Wide Timers
Station-Wide Timers
Assign COS Contents
Station Key Programming
System Key Programming

MMC 102 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 103
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SET ANSWER MODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any keyset. Each keyset can
have its answer mode set to one of the following options:
0. RING: The keyset will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls are answered by pressing
the ANS/RLS key or by lifting the handset.
1. AUTO ANSWER: After giving a short attention tone, the keyset will automatically answer calls
on the speakerphone. When a C.O. line is transferred to a keyset in Auto Answer mode, the
screened portion of the call will be Auto Answer, but the keyset will ring when the transfer is
complete if the user has not pressed the ANS/RLS key or lifted the handset.
2. VOICE ANNOUNCE: The keyset will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can make an
announc ement but the ANS/RLS key or hand set must be used to answer calls.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 103
Display shows

[201] ANS MODE
RING MODE

Dial keyset number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select keyset
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select All

[205] ANS MODE
RING MODE

Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change ring mode
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select ring mode and
press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[205] ANS MODE
VOICE ANNOUNCE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All keysets = RING
Ring frequency default = 5

Related Items:

MMC 111 Keyset Ring Tone

MMC 103 (Page 1 of 1)

[ALL] ANS MODE
?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 104
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

STATION NAME
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to enter a name, up to 11 characters, to identify an individual station.
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to
the next position. For example, if the name is “SAM SMITH”, press the number “7” four times to
get the letter “S”. Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A” Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete your name. Press the programmable “A” key to toggle between
upper and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, then select the character.

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Key #19 (24B keyset) or key #7 (12B keyset) or key #1 (6B keyset)
toggles upper and lower case text.

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 104
Display shows

[201] STN NAME

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] STN NAME
_

Enter the station name using the procedure described
above and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[205] STN NAME
SAM SMITH_

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

None

MMC 104 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 105
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

STATION SPEED DIAL
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to program personal speed dial numbers for stations. This may
be particularly useful for single line telephones which are more difficult to program by the station
user. Each station can have up to five blocks of speed dials—each containing 10 numbers (giving a total of 50 numbers)—assigned to it in MMC 606, Assign Speed Block. By default, each station has one block (for 10 numbers) assigned.
Speed dials are numbered 00–49. Each speed dial may contain a trunk or trunk group access
code (e.g. 9) followed by a separator (–) and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dialled digits
can be 0–9, [ and #. If the system recognises a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will
automatically insert the separator.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“B”
”C”
”D”
”E”
”F”

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to insert a flash code “F”
Used to insert a pause code “P”
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code “C”
Used to mask/unmask following digits (shows as “[“ or “]”)
Used to enter name for speed dial bin (see MMC 106)

Keys “A” to “F” are keys #19 to #24 on 24B keysets, or keys #7 to #12 on 12B keysets, or keys
#1 to #6 on 6B keysets.
ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 105
Display shows

[ 201] SPEED DIAL
00 :

Dial station number (e.g. 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor
If selected station has no speed dial blocks assigned,
the display will be as shown and a new station may be
selected.

[205] SPEED DIAL
00 :

Enter speed dial number (e.g., 05)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select location and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

[205] SPEED DIAL
05: _

Enter trunk access code (e.g., 9) followed by the
number to be dialled (e.g., 08104264100)

[205] SPEED DIAL
05 : 9-08104264100_

If you make an error, press the HOLD key to clear an
entire entry or use the DOWN key to move the cursor
back

MMC 105 (Page 1 of 2)

[ 205] SPEED DIAL
NO SPEED BLOCK

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
5.

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press the “F” key to access MMC 106, Station Speed
Dial Name, to enter name
OR
Press the LEFT soft key to return to step 3 (new dial no)
OR
Press the RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 (new stn)
OR
Press TRSF to save and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 106 Station Speed Dial Name
MMC 606 Assign Speed Block

MMC 105 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 106
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Allows a name, up to 11 characters, to be entered for each personal speed dial location. This
name enables the speed dial number to be located when the directory dial feature is used. The
directory dial feature allows the display keyset user to select a speed dial location by viewing its
name.
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to
the next position. For example, if the name is “SAM SMITH”, press the number “7” four times to
get the letter “S”. Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A” Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete your name. Press the programmable “A” key to toggle between
upper and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, then select the character.

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 106
Display shows

[ 201] SPEED NAME
00:

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR

[205] SPEED NAME
00:

Press UP or DOWN to select station and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor
If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display
will be as shown and a new station may be selected

[ 205] SPEED NAME
NO SPEED BLOCK

Dial speed dial location (e.g., 01)
OR

[205] SPEED NAME
01:_

Press UP or DOWN to scroll through location
numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
4.

Enter the location name using the procedure
described above and press RIGHT soft key to
return to step 2

MMC 106 (Page 1 of 2)

[205] SPEED NAME
01:SAM SMITH_

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
5.

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 105 Station Speed Dial
MMC 606 Assign Speed Block

MMC 106 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 107
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

KEY EXTENDER
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to view the programmable keys assigned to keyset stations. In addition, it allows the
system administrator to assign key extenders to those programmed keys which can have extenders, making general access feature keys more specific. For example, you may want to
set an SPD (Speed Dial) key to dial personal speed dial code 01 when selected. (Extenders
may also be entered in MMC 722 or 723 when programming key assignments.) The feature
keys that can have extenders are listed below.
FEATURE
KEY

FUNCTION

BOSS

Boss and Secretary

DIR

Directory dial by name type

Direct Pick Up

Extension or station group number

Direct Station Select

Station number

FWRD

Call Forward

GPIK

Group Pick Up

In/Out Group

MMPG

EXTENDER
DCS

CII

816

408/408i

1–4

1–2

1–3

0–5
01–20

01–20

01–08

01–04

500–529

500–519

500–509

50–53

Meet Me Page

0–9, Q

0–4, 5, Q

0–2, 5, Q

PAGE

Page

0–9, Q

0–4, 5, Q

0–2, 5, Q

PMSG

Programmed Station Message

Station Group

500–529

500–519

500–509

50–53

SPD

Speed Dial

00–49,
500–999

00–49,
500–799

00–49,
500–699

UCD Supervisor

UCD/ACD Group Number

VM Transfer

VM/AA Group Number

01–20

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

MMC 107 (Page 1 of 2)

N/A

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION
1.

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 107
Display shows
OR
For 408 and 408i systems, display shows:

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR

[201] EXT (MAST)
01:CALL1 →
OR
[21] EXT EXTEND
01:DT71 →
[205] EXT (MAST)
01:CALL1 →

Use UP or DOWN to scroll through station numbers
and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor
3.

Enter key number (e.g., 18)
OR

[205] EXT (MAST)
18:DS
→_

Press UP and DOWN to scroll through keys and use
RIGHT soft key to move the cursor
OR
Use above table to select desired extender
System will return to this step

205] EXT (MAST)
18:DS
→DS207

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Note: If the RIGHT soft key will not move the cursor to the right, you are attempting to add an extender to a key
that cannot have one (refer to the table, above, for allowed key extenders).

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

720
721
722
723

Copy Key Programming
Save Station Key Programming
Station Key Programming
System Key Programming

MMC 107 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 108
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

STATION STATUS
3

CII

816

408i

408

This is a read-only MMC. Displays the following attributes of a station port:
DCS

Compact II

816

408 / 408i

PORT NO: #: Cabinet
(1–3)/Slot (1–7)/Port (1–
16)

PORT NO: Slot
(BASE, OSLI, MISC,
EX1–7)/Port (1–16)

PORT NO: 8DLI (01–
08) or 4SLI (01–04)

PORT NO: 4DLI (01–
04) or 4SLI (01–04)

TENANT NUMBER: 1–2

TYPE: Type of phone
(e.g. 12B EU)

TYPE: Type of phone
(e.g. 12B, 24B)

PICKUP GROUP:
None, 01–20

PICKUP GROUP:
None, 01–08

PICKUP GROUP:
None, 01–04

PICKUP GROUP: None,
01–20

SGR: Station Group
Number

BOSS-SECR: None,
BOSS, SECR

PAGE: Page Zone
(None, 1–4, *)

PAGE: Page Zone
(None, 1–2)

PAGE: Page Zone
(None, 1–4, *)

DAY COS NO: COS
(01–30)

DAY COS NO: COS
(01–10)

DAY COS NO: COS
(1–4)

DAY COS NO: COS
(01–30)

NIGHT COS NO: COS
(01–30)

NIGHT COS NO: COS
(01–10)

NIGHT COS NO: COS
(1–4)

NIGHT COS NO: COS
(01–30)

—

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 108
Display shows first station (e.g. for Compact II)

[ 201] STN STATUS
PORT NO:BASE01

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

[205] STN STATUS
PORT NO:EX1-01

Dial 0–8 using table above to select station status
option
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select status and press RIGHT
soft key to return to step 2

[205] STN STATUS
PICKUP GROUP:01

MMC 108 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
4.

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press TRSF to exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Related Items:

Port No:
Type:
Tenant Number:
Pickup Group:
SGR:
Boss–Secr:
Page:
Day COS No:
Night COS No:

Follows hardware position
Follows phone type
1 (DCS only)
01
None
None
None
01 (or 1)
01 (or 1)

MMC 301 Assign Station COS
MMC 302 Pickup Groups
MMC 303 Assign Boss/Secretary
MMC 601 Assign Station Group
MMC 604 Assign Station to Page Zone
MMC 803 Assign Tenant Group (DCS only)

MMC 108 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 109
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

DATE DISPLAY
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to select the date and time display mode on a per-station basis
or system-wide.
0

COUNTRY

Sets overall display format and has two options:
0 = ORIENTAL
MM/DD DAY HH:MM
1 = WESTERN
DAY DD MON HH:MM

CLOCK

Sets format of clock display and has two options:
0 = 12 HOUR
Displays 1 P. M. as 01:00
1 = 24 HOUR
Displays 1 P. M. as 13:00

DISPLAY

Sets format of DAY and MONTH display and has two options:
0 = UPPER CASE
Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR
1 = LOWER CASE
Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 109
Display shows

[ 201] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS for all keysets

[205] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN

Dial 0–2 to select option (e.g. Country)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to scroll through modes and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN

Dial 0 or 1 to select option format (e.g. Oriental)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select format and
press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[205] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:ORIENTAL

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Country:
Clock:
Display:

Western
24 hour
Lowercase

Related Items:

MMC 505 Assign Date and Time
MMC 109 (Page 1 of 1)

[ALL]DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 110
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

STATION ON/OFF
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to set any of the followi ng keyset features.
AUTO HOLD

Automatically places an existing C.O. call on hold if a CALL key,
trunk key or trunk route key is pressed during that call.

AUTO TIMER

Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a C.O. call. (CALL
COST option, below, should be OFF for this feature to work.)

HEADSET USE

When ON, this feature disables the hookswitch allowing a headset
user to answer all calls by pressing the ANS/RLS key.

HOT KEYPAD

When ON, this feature allows the user to dial numbers on the keypad
without having to first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key.

KEY TONE

Allows the user to hear a slight tone when pressing keys on the keyset.

PAGE REJOIN

Allows the user to hear the latter part of page announcements if the
keyset becomes free during a page.

RING PREFER

When OFF, requires the user to press the fast flashing button to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset.

CALL COST

If enabled (ON), LCD shows real-time call cost based on Metering
Pulses arrived. (See AUTO TIMER option.)

AME BGM

Determines whether a station using Answering Machine Emulation
will hear their personal greeting or background music (BGM) while
callers are listening to the personal greeting. A BGM source must be
selected for this to work. (Cadence and SVMi-4 voice mail systems
only.)

AME PSWD

Sets the Answering Machine Emulation password ON or OFF. (Cadence and SVMi-4 voice mail systems only.)

NOT CONT.CID

When ON, the keyset displays the call timer for the duration of an incoming trunk call (if AUTO TIMER is ON). When OFF, the CLIP number for a call is displayed for the duration of the call. (Not applicable
to 408 systems.)

Note: Keyset users can set or change these options for their own keyset (refer to the Samsung DCS Keyset
User Guide for details).

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

MMC 110 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 110
Display shows

[ 201] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD :OFF

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select keyset and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS for ALL

[205] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD :OFF

Press UP or DOWN to select option and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] STN ON/OFF
HOT KEYPAD : ON

Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF and
press LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 3

[205] STN ON/OFF
HOT KEYPAD :OFF

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Related Items:

Auto Hold
Auto Timer
Headset Use
Hot Keypad
Key Tone
Page Rejoin
Ring Pref
Call Cost
Not Cont.CID
AME BGM
AME PSWD

Off
On
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off

MMC 301 Assign Station COS
MMC 701 Assign COS Contents

MMC 110 (Page 2 of 2)

[ALL] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD : ?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 111
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

KEYSET RING TONE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to select the ring tone heard at each keyset. There are eight (1–
8) ring tones available. A short tone burst of the selection will be heard when a key is pressed.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 111
Display shows

[ 201] RING TONE
SELECTION 5

Dial keyset number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select All

[205] RING TONE
SELECTION 5

Dial 1–8 to select ring tone
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select ring tone and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] RING TONE
SELECTION 6

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

SELECTION 5

Related Items:

MMC 114 Station Volume

MMC 111 (Page 1 of 1)

[ALL] RING TONE
SELECTION ?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 112
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ALARM REMINDER
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to set or change the alarm clock/appointment reminder feature
for any station. Keyset users can set their own alarms. A number of alarms may be set for each
station: three (1–3) for DCS systems or two (1– 2) for Compact II, 816 and 408/408i systems.
Each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm, or NOTSET as
described below. The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY
alarm rings every day at the same time.
Dial 0:

NOTSET

Dial 1:

TODAY

Dial 2:

DAILY

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 112
Display shows

[201]
HHMM:

ALM CLK(1)
èNOTSET

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205]
HHMM:

ALM CLK(1)
èNOTSET

Dial alarm number (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2

[205]
HHMM:

ALM CLK(2)
èNOTSET

Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format
(e.g., 1300)
Display will automatically advance to step 5

[205]
ALM CLK (2)
HHMM:1300èNOTSET

Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type (e.g. 2,
DAILY)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm type
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and
return to step 2

[205]
ALM CLK (2)
HHMM:1300èDAILY

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Alarms set to NOTSET

Related Items:

None

MMC 112 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 113
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

VIEW MEMO NUMBER
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to enter memos on stations. Up to three memos can be entered,
depending on your system. MMC 116 (Alarm and Message) can be programmed to remind the
station user to read the memo(s).
Each memo can be up to 13 characters long and is entered using the dial keypad. For example,
press “6” once to enter the letter ”M”, and press ”3” twice for an ”E”. Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete the memo. Press the programmable ”A” key to toggle between
upper and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, then select the character.

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”

Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Key #19 (24B keyset) or key #7 (12B keyset) or key #1 (6B keyset)
toggles uppercase and lowercase text.

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 113
Display shows

[201] VIEW MEMO
1:

Dial the station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] VIEW MEMO
1:

Dial memo number (1–3)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft
key to move cursor

[205] VIEW MEMO
1:_

Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and add
memo via dial keypad using above procedure

[205] VIEW MEMO
1:CALL TOM

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 116 Alarm and Message

MMC 113 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 114
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

STATION VOLUME
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to set volume levels for keysets.
0

RING VOLUME

Set a level for ring volume. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is
the lowest and level 8 the highest.

OFF-RING VOL

Set a level for off-hook ring volume. There are eight volume levels:
level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.

HANDSET VOL

Set a level for listening volume through handset. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.

SPEAKER VOL

Set a level for listening volume through speaker. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

BGM VOLUME

Set a level for background music volume. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 114
Display shows

[ 201] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME : 4

Dial station number (e.g. 205)

[205] STN VOLUME
R ING VOLUME : 4

Dial option number
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select option and press
RIGHT soft key

[205] STN VOLUME
OFF-RING VOL: 4

Dial volume level using keypad (you will hear a brief tone
for the level you select) and system returns to step 3
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select volume (you will hear a brief
tone for each level) and press RIGHT soft key to return to
step 3

[205] STN VOLUME
OFF-RING VOL: 3

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Ring Volume
Off-Hook Ring Volume
Handset Volume
Speaker Volume
BGM Volume

Related Items:

MMC 111 Keyset Ring Tone

4
4
4
13
13

MMC 114 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 115
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at individual or all keysets. There
are 20 messages available (01–20). These messages are as set up in MMC 715, Programmed
Station Message.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 115
Display shows

[ 201] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL PGM MSG

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select All

[205] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL PGM MSG

Dial 01–20 to select message number (e.g., 05)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select message and press RIGHT
soft key to return to step 2
OR
Select 00 to cancel a previously set message

[205] PGMMSG(05)
PAGE ME

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

No messages selected

Related Items:

MMC 715 Programmed Station Message
MMC 722 Station Key Programming
MMC 723 System Key Programming

MMC 115 (Page 1 of 1)

[ALL] PGMMSG(?? )

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 116
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ALARM AND MESSAGE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment reminder feature for individual or all stations. For DCS systems, three alarms (1–3) can be set
for each station. For other systems, two alarms (1–2) can be set. Each alarm may be defined
as a one-time or TODAY alarm, as a DAILY alarm, or NOTSET as described below. The TODAY
alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same
time. It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded.
Dial

Alarm Type

0
1
2

NOTSET
TODAY
DAILY

Messages are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the message is “MEETING”, press the number “6” once
to get the letter “M”. Now press the number “3” twice to get the letter “E” Continue selecting
characters from the keypad to complete your message. Press the programmable “A” key to toggle between upper and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, then select the character.

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Key #19 (24B keysets) or key #7 (12B keysets) or key #1 (6B keysets) toggles upper case and lower case text.

MMC 116 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 116
Display shows

[ 201]
HHMM:

ALM REM(1)
èNOTSET

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all stations

[205]
HHMM:

ALM REM(1)
èNOTSET

[ALL]
HHMM:

ALM REM(1)
èNOTSET

Dial alarm number (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

[205]
HHMM:

ALM REM(2)
èNOTSET

Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format
(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)

[205]
ALM REM(2)
HHMM:1300èNOTSET

Display will automatically advance to step 5
5.

Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type (e.g. 2,
DAILY)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm type and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205]
ALM REM(2)
HHMM:1300èDAILY

Enter message using above method and press RIGHT
soft key to return to step 2

[205] ALM REM(2)
Meeting

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Alarms set to NOTSET

Related Items:

None

MMC 116 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 119
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SET CLIP DISPLAY
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator or keyset user to change the order in which CLIP information is
displayed on a keyset LCD. CLIP display options are as follows:
0

NO DISPLAY

No CLIP data is displayed.

NUMBER FIRST

CLIP number received from central office is displayed first.

NAME FIRST

CLIP name is displayed first (if set in MMC 728)

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Save data and advance to next MMC
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 119
Display shows

[201] CLIP DISP.
NAME FIRST

Enter station number (e.g. 204)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to scroll through stations and
press RIGHT soft key to select a station
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select ALL

[204] CLIP DISP.
NAME FIRST

Dial display option 0, 1 or 2 (e.g. 1)
Press UP or DOWN to select option and press
RIGHT or LEFT soft key to return to step 2

[204] CLIP DISP.
NUMBER FIRST

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC

Default Data :

NAME FIRST

Related Items:

MMC 728 CLIP Translation Table

MMC 119 (Page 1 of 1)

[ALL] CLIP DISP.
?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 121
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

KEYSET LANGUAGE
7

CII

816

408i

408

Used to assign an LCD display based on a keyset user’s own language. Options include some or
all of the following, depending on your system:
ENGLISH
GERMAN
PORTUGAL
NORSK (NORWAY)
DANISH
DUTCH
ITALY
SPANISH
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 121
Display shows

[ 201] LANGUAGE
ENGLISH

Dial keyset number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select keyset and press RIGHT
soft key
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select All

[205] LANGUAGE
ENGLISH

Press UP or DOWN to select language and press
RIGHT soft key.

[205] LANGUAGE
GERMAN

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

ENGLISH

Related Items:

Multi-Language

MMC 121 (Page 1 of 1)

[ALL] LANGUAGE
?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 200
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

OPEN CUSTOMER
PROGRAMMING
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to open (enable) or close (disable) customer-level programming by the system administrator. If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a customer-level MMC, the
error message [NOT PERMIT] will be displayed. A four-digit passcode is required to enable customer programming (which can be changed in MMC 201, if required). Each digit can be 0–9.
When opened, this MMC allows access to all MMCs specified by the system installer in MMC
802, Customer Access MMC Number.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
TRSF

Select open or closed
Used to enter passcode
Save data and advance to next MMC
Exit Programming

ACTION

DISPLAY

Press TRSF 200
Display shows

ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE:_

Enter passcode

ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE: ∗∗∗∗

Correct code shows

ENABLE CUS.PROG.
DISABLE

Incorrect code shows

ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSWORD ERROR

Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE
OR
Press UP or DOWN arrow key to select ENABLE or
DISABLE and press RIGHT soft key

ENABLE CUS.PROG.
ENABLE

Press SPEAKER to advance to MMC entry level and
press UP or DOWN key to select MMC (e.g. 212)
OR
Enter MMC number and press RIGHT soft
key to enter MMC

212:ALARM RING
SELECT PROG. ID

Press TRSF key to exit

Default Data:

DISABLE (closed)
Passcode=1234

Related Items:

MMC 201 Change Customer Passcode
MMC 501 System-Wide Timers
MMC 802 Customer Access MMC Number

MMC 200 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 201
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CHANGE CUSTOMER
PASSCODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200, Open Customer Programming, from
its current value.
PROGRAM KEYS
KEYPAD
SPEAKER

Used to enter passcodes
Save data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 201

CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_

Enter new passcode via dial keypad (maximum four
digits)

CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE: QQQQ

Verify new passcode via dial keypad

CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY : QQQQ

PASSCODE verify successful
(go to step 4)
OR
PASSCODE verify failure
(return to step 2)

CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :SUCCESS

CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :FAILURE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to
next MMC

Default Data:

Passcode = 1234

Related Items:

MMC 200 Open Customer Programming

MMC 201 (Pages 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 202
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CHANGE FEATURE
PASSCODES
7

CII

816

408i

408

Your system supports some or all of the following features:
DAY/NIGHT
DISA ALARM
ALARM CLR
AA RECORD
DECT (BSI) REGISTER
This MMC is used to change the passcode for supported features
Note: The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0–9.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter passcodes
Save data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 202
Display shows

CHANGE PASSCODE
DAY/NIGHT :0000

Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor to passcode entry

CHANGE PASSCODE
ALARM CLR :8765

Enter new passcode via digits from
dial keypad

CHANGE PASSCODE
ALARM CLR :9999

Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
Continue to change other passcodes
4.

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to
next MMC

Default Data:

DAY/NIGHT
DISA ALARM
ALARM CLR
AA RECORD
DECT REGISTER

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

0000
5678
8765
4321
4321

212 Alarm Ringing Station
214 DISA Alarm Ringing Station
410 Assign DISA Trunk
507 Assign Auto Night Time
737 DECT System Code
744 BSI Registration On/Off

MMC 202 (Pages 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 203
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN UA DEVICE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns the ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer (UA) key is pressed or the
UA pickup code is dialled. UA assignment is made in MMC 601, Assign Station Group, for a
group and then the group is entered here. The UA device can be one of the device types listed
below. The device type is automatically determined by the directory number (DN) entered.

DIRECTORY NUMBER (DN)
DCS

CII

816

DEVICE TYPE

DESCRIPTION

408/408i

201–349

201–308

201–216

21–28

STATION

The UA device is a keyset
or SLT.

3601–3602

361–365

361–362

361

RING PAGE

Ring over page.

500–529

500–519

500–509

50–53

STATION
GROUP

The UA device is a station
group.

Note: Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one item (e.g., all four
external page zones) is required, a station group containing all four zone codes must be created.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter DN of selected device
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 203
Display shows current assignment

ASSIGN UA PORT
NONE-NO UA

Dial DN of UA device (e.g., 205)
OR

ASSIGN UA PORT
205 -STATION

Use UP and DOWN keys to scroll through
available devices
3.

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

204 Common Bell Control
219 Common Relay Service Type
601 Assign Station Group
605 Assign External Page Zone

MMC 203 (Pages 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 204
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

COMMON BELL CONTROL
3

CII

816

408i

408

Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous clo sure
when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an internal ring pattern of one second
closed followed by three seconds open.
By default, all common bell relay pairs are assigned as:
DCS: 380x
Compact II: 363–365
816: 362
408 and 408i: 361
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION
1.

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 204
Display shows current setting
(Note: Display differs according to system)

Dial common bell number
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection of
common bell numbers and press RIGHT soft key to
advance cursor

Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through options
Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

[3801]COM. BELL
CONTINUOUS
OR
[363] COM/LD BELL
CONTINUOUS

[3801]COM. BELL
INTERRUPTED
OR
[363] COM/LD BELL
INTERRUPTED

Default Data:

Continuous

Related Items:

MMC 203 Assign UA Device
MMC 219 Common Relay Service Type
MMC 601 Assign Station Group

MMC 204 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 205
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN LOUD BELL
7

CII

816

408i

408

Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of one of the following:
DCS systems—a Trunk A card. Each Trunk A card has one loud bell output; these outputs are
given a Directory Number of 3901–3920 as a default value to enable them to be assigned.
Compact II systems—a Misc card (assigned in MMC 219, Common Relay Service Type).
816 and 408/408i systems—a base board (assigned in MMC 219, Common Relay Service
Type).
The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station. Only a station can be assigned to control the loud bell; a station group cannot be assigned.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Clears previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 205
Display shows current setting

[361] LOUD BELL
RING PAIR : NONE

Dial loud bell number (e.g., 362)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through loud bell
numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor

[362] LOUD BELL
RING PAIR : NONE

Enter station number (e.g., 201)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and
press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[362] LOUD BELL
RING PAIR :201

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE (Unassigned)

Related Items:

MMC 219 Common Relay Service Type

MMC 205 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 206
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

BARGE-IN TYPE
3

CII

816

408i

408

The Barge In feature allows selected keysets to intrude on other keysets which are not set as secure from barge in. This MMC sets the type of barge-in that is permitted.
DIAL

TYPE OF BARGE-IN

DESCRIPTION

NO BARGE IN

Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a station’s barge-in status.

WITH TONE

Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and display at
the barged-in on station.

WITHOUT TONE

There is no barge-in tone or display at the barged-in
on station and the barging-in station will be muted.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 206
Display shows

BARGE IN TYPE
NO BARGE IN

Dial 0–2 to select barge-in type (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select barge-in type
and press RIGHT soft key

BARGE IN TYPE
WITHOUT TONE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NO BARGE IN

Related Items:

MMC 301 Assign Station COS
MMC 701 Assign COS Contents

MMC 206 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 207
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
3

CII

816

408i

408

Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VMAA. VMAA ports receive digits designated
in MMC 726, VM/AA Options, and also receive a true disconnect signal upon completion of a call.
Do not make VMAA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration. VMAA ports have the equivalent of data protect written in the program and are protected
against tones.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 207
Display shows

[209] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT

Dial 1 or 0 to select port type (1=VMAA, 0=NORMAL)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select option and press
RIGHT soft key

[205] VMAA PORT
VMAA PORT

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NORMAL PORT

Related Items:

MMC 601 Assign Station Group
MMC 726 VM/AA Options

MMC 207 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 208
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN RING TYPE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides the flexibility to program SLTs to have ICM ringing, C.O. ringing and data secure. With
the many types of external ringing devices, all configurations can be met. DATA RING also has a
positive disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this will return them to a single line
port and stop voice mail integration.
OPTIONS
0
1
2

ICM RING
C.O. RING
DATA RING

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 208
Display shows

[209] RING TYPE
ICM RING

Dial SLT station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] RING TYPE
ICM RING

Dial 0, 1 or 2 to select port type (e.g. 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select option and press
LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 above

[205] RING TYPE
DATA RING

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

ICM RING

Related Items:

None

MMC 208 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 209
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Designates to which station an add-on module (AOM) is assigned.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
RELEASE
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Clears previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 209
Display shows first AOM

[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:NONE

Dial AOM number
OR
Press UP or DOWN to scroll through AOM numbers
and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor

[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:NONE

Enter station number, (e.g., 201)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station numbers

[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:201

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

MASTER = NONE

Related Items:

None

MMC 209 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 210
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CUSTOMER ON/OFF
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to set system features on or off. Not all features are available on
all systems. Refer to the following table for details (a tick means “available”).
FEATURE

SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION
DCS / C II

816

408/408i

DISA PSWD

Determines whether outside customers are re quired to
enter DISA passcode (Yes=ON, No=OFF).

LCR ENABLE

Enables LCR feature in the system.

SMDI VMS SET

Allows SMDI integration through RS-232 port for the external PC-based Voice Mail system

PERI UCD SET

Periodic UCD information provider. Enables UCD statistics data on a per UCD group basis to print out on the I/O
port which has been set as SMDR or UCD REPT in real
time (see MMC 501- PERI UCD REPORT timer option).
This allows extended manipulation of the information by
an external third-party-provided software package.

CID CODE INS

Allows the digit ‘1’ to be automatically inserted for a toll
call. (Not used in UK.)

408i only

DISA MOH

An additional option that can be presented to outside
DISA callers: a variable indication provided by an MOH
source instead of a fixed DISA dial tone.

Callers who have been transferred from an extension or
UCD group or AA group will hear MOH, until answered
by the called extension, instead of ring back tone.

LCD displays programmed name of SYSTEM SPEED bin
(in MMC 706) if it has been programmed; if not, it shows
digits programmed in MMC 705 even if this is set to ON.

DDI calls to a busy extension can be routed to an assigned destination, in MMC 406, before the call is
dropped.

408i only

DID NOT ROUT

DDI calls with no mapping in MMC 714 can be routed to
an assigned destination in MMC 406.

408i only

ALL PICK UP

Independent pickup group, can pick up all calls.

ARD TONE CHK

When system detects CO BUSY TONE from Central Office, it returns to autoredial state.

VPN ENABLE

Allows use of VPN (Virtual Private Network) feature linked
with network. (For future use.)

408 only

ISDNTRK BUSY

Allows busy tone to be returned to incoming DDI calls to
station group if all group members are busy. (Sequential
or distribute groups only.)

408i only

IN TOLL CHK

For future use.

ISDN PROGCON

For future use.

408i only

ISDN KEYFAC

ISDN Key Facility.

408i only

TRANSFER MOH

DSP SSPDNAME

DID BSY ROUT

MMC 210 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 210
Display shows

TEN. ON AND OFF
DISA PSW D :ON

Dial option number (e.g. 01)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select option
Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

TEN. ON AND OFF
LCR ENABLE :OFF

Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
OR
Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

TEN. ON AND OFF
LCR ENABLE :ON

Repeat steps 2-3 for other options
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

DISA PSWD
LCR ENABLE
SMDI VMS SET
PERI UCD SET
CID CODE INS
DISA MOH
TRANSFER MOH
DSP SSPDNAME
DID BSY ROUT
DID NOT ROUT
ALL PICK UP
ARD TONE CHK
VPN ENABLE
ISDNTRK BUSY
IN TOLL CHK
ISDN PROGCON

Related Items:

None

On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off

MMC 210 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 211
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

CII

816

408i

408

Designates which devices will ring when a doorphone button is pressed for both day and night
mode. Two types of device can ring: station and station group; these are listed below with their
default directory numbers.
DEVICE
Station
Station group

DEFAULT DIRECTORY NUMBER
DCS

Compact II

816

408/408i

201–349
500–529

201–308
500–519

201–216
500–509

21–28
50–53

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Clears previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 211
Display shows first doorphone
(If there is no doorphone interface module, you
see “DOOR NOT EXIST”)

[201] DOOR RING
D:500
N:500

Dial doorphone number (e.g., 210)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to scroll through
doorphone numbers and use the RIGHT
soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all door ring

[210] DOOR RING
D:500
N:500

Enter new DAY selection via dial keypad (e.g. 301)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and
press RIGHT soft key

[210] DOOR RING
D:301
N:500

Enter new NIGHT selection via dial keypad (e.g. 302)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and
press RIGHT soft key

[210] DOOR RING
D:301
N:302

Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 3
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

[ALL] DOOR RING
D:500
N:500

Default Data:

Station group 500 for day and night (group 50 for 408/408i systems)

Related Items:

None
MMC 211 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 212
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ALARM RINGING STATION
7

CII

816

408i

408

Used to determine which devices will be alerted when an alarm sensor is activated.
Device
Station
Station group

DCS
201–349
500–529

Compact II
201 - 308
500 - 519

The above devices will ring like a doorphone and follow the door ring time-out. When ringing,
display keysets show the display assigned in MMC 213, Alarm Message. The bottom line of the
keyset display gives an option to clear the alarm. Ringing initiated by an alarm sensor is answered by going off-hook and on-hook again at a ringing keyset. If a device such as Ring Over
Page or a common bell is the only device assigned to ring, it may be answered by assigning a
direct pickup key with this device as the extender. If the alarm is unanswered by the door ring
time-out, ringing will cease but the display will remain until cleared by dialling the alarm clear feature code (57) and passcode (default 8765).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 212
Display shows first sensor (3501 on DCS system or
351 on Compact II system)

[3501]ALARM RING
D:500
N:500

Dial sensor number (e.g., 3502 or 352)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through sensor numbers
and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor

[3502]ALARM RING
D:500
N:500

Enter valid ring destination for day (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to advance cursor

[3502]ALARM RING
D:205
N:500

Select night destination in the same way
4.

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All sensors ring 500 day/night

Related Items:

MMC 213 Alarm Message

MMC 212 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 213
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ALARM MESSAGE
7

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the assignment of a name to an alarm sensor. Names are written using the dial keypad.
Each press of a key selects a character and moves the cursor to the next position. For example,
if the sensor name is “FIRE,” press the number “3” three times to get the letter “F.” Now press
the number “4” three times to get the letter “I", and so on to complete the name. Press the programmable ”A” key to toggle between upper and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, then select the character.

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 213
Display shows (e.g. 351 for Compact II)

[351] ALARM NAME

Dial ALARM (e.g., 351 for Compact II or 3502
for DCS)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[351] ALARM NAME
_

Enter name using method described above and
press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[351] ALARM NAME
FIRE!

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 212 Alarm Ringing Station

MMC 213 [DCS / Co mpact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 214
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

DISA ALARM RINGING
STATION

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended that the person who can
clear the alarm also receives the notification. Both a day and a night destination can be selected.
A valid destination can be:
DEVICE
Station
Station group

DEFAULT DIRECTORY NUMBER
DCS

Compact II

816

408/408i

201–349
500–529

201–308
500–519

201–216
500–509

21–28
50–53

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 214
Display shows

DISA ALARM RING
D:500
N:500

Enter in valid day destination number (e.g., 212)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor

DISA ALARM RING
D:212
N:500

Enter in valid night destination number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

DISA ALARM RING
D:212
N:205

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Day 500 (50 for 408/408i)
Night 500 (50 for 408/408i)

Related Items:

MMC 202 Change Feature Passcodes
MMC 410 Assign DISA Trunk

MMC 214 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 215
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns the VDIAL card with two (2) channels and seven (7) users or one (1) channel and five (5) users. When changing channel size, you will be prompted to ‘clear RAM’. This is only for Voice Dialler,
not the system. This will prevent accidental usage of pre-recorded names. It is advised that you clear
RAM before assigning users in MMC 216, Voice Dialler Assignments.
VDIAL cards are numbered with odd numbers. For example, the first VDIAL card in the system is
numbered 3551 (DCS) or 355 (Compact II). The second channel, if used, will be numbered 3552 (or
356).The second VDIAL card is numbered 3553 (or 357), and a second channel 3554 (or 358). If only
one channel is assigned, the even number 3552 or 3554 (356 or 358) will not appear in MMC 216.
Option -

0 : 2CH-7USER-20BIN
1 : 1CH-5USER-40BIN

( 7 USERS )
( 5 USERS )

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 215
Display shows (3551 for DCS or 355 for CII,
e.g. 3551)

[ 3551]VDIALER OPTN
2CH-7USER -20BIN

Enter Voice Dialler number, e.g. 3552, via dial keypad
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[3552]VDIALER OPTN
2CH-7USER -20BIN

Select channel option by pressing UP or DOWN key to
view selection
Press RIGHT soft key to make selection

[3552]VDIALER OPTN
1CH-5USER -40BIN

Enter 0 for NO or 1 for YES
OR
Press UP and DOWN key to view selection
Press RIGHT soft key to make selection

[3552]VDIALER OPTN
CLEAR RAM? NO

[3552]VDIALER OPTN
CLEAR RAM? YES

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance
to next MMC

Default Data:

2CH-7USER-20BIN

Related Items:

MMC 216 Voice Dialler Assignments
MMC 722 Station Key Programming
MMC 723 System Key Programming
MMC 724 Dial Numbering Plan
Keyset User Guide

MMC 215 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 216
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

VOICE DIALLER
ASSIGNMENTS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows a station to be assigned to a channel of the VDIAL card, to dial a personal speed dial
number. The number of users assigned to this feature is controlled by MMC 215, Voice Dialler
Options, which allows either two (2) channels with seven (7) users or one (1) channel with five (5)
users.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 216
Display shows (DCS=3551, Compact II=355,
e.g. 355)

[355]VDIALER USER
USER 1 : NONE

Enter Voice Dialler number (e.g. 356) via dial keypad
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[356]VDIALER USER
USER 1 : NONE

Enter user number (1-7/1-5) dependent on number of
users allowed via MMC 215 (e.g. 5)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[356]VDIALER USER
USER 5 : NONE

Enter station number (e.g., 205) via dial keypad
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to return to step 3 to continue with entries

[356]VDIALER USER
USER 5 : 205

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

MMC 215 Voice Dialler Options
MMC 722 Station Key Programming
MMC 723 System Key Programming
MMC 724 Dial Numbering Plan
Keyset User Guide

MMC 216 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 217
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CCC OPTION
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to select Call Cost Option and is related only to 131 Cable & Wireless service.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 217
Display shows

CCC OPTION
OPTION : NONE

Use UP or DOWN to scroll through options

CCC OPTION
OPTION : STATION #

Press TRANSFER to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance
to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

MMC 313 Assign PIN Code

MMC 217 [Compact I] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 219
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

COMMON RELAY SERVICE
TYPE
7

CII

816

408i

408

This MMC is used to define the function of :
• three common relays in the Compact II MISC card (363–365), or
• the common relay in the 816 base board (362), or
• the common relay in the 408/408i base board (361).
Each relay can be used for one of the following:
0
1
2
3

EXTERNAL PAGE
COMMON BELL
LOUD BELL
NOT USE

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 219
Display shows (e.g. 363)

[363]RELAY TYPE
EXTERNAL PAGE

Compact II only – dial relay number (e.g. 364)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through numbers and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[364]RELAY TYPE
EXTERNAL PAGE

816/408/408i – press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
3.

Dial relay function 0–3 (see table above)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to scroll through options
and press RIGHT soft key

[364]RELAY TYPE
LOUD BELL

Compact II only–Repeat step 2 for next relay

[364]RELAY TYPE
NOT USE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

EXTERNAL PAGE

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

203 Assign UA Device
204 Common Bell Control
205 Assign Loud Bell
605 Assign External Page Zone

MMC 219 [Compact II / 816] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 220
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ISDN SERVICE TYPE
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns the ISDN service type for SLT stations. Services consist of BC (Bearer Capability) and
HLC (High Layer Capability).

0
1
2
3

TYPE

DESCRIPTION

HLC

VOICE
FAX 3
AUDIO 3.1
MODEM

Voice service
G3 FAX service
3.1kHz Audio service
MODEM service

Speech
3.1kHz Audio
3.1kHz Audio
3.1kHz Audio

Telephony
FAX G2/G3
None
Telephony

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 220
Display shows

[213] ISDN SRV
VOICE

Dial station number (SLT only) (e.g., 215)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[215] ISDN SRV
VOICE

Select service type 0 - 3 (e.g. 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select option and press
RIGHT soft key

[215] ISDN SRV
AUDIO 3.1

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

VOICE

Related Items:

None

MMC 220 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 300
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER
STATION
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the following features to be enabled on individual stations.
ACCESS DIAL

Determines whether a user can select a trunk or trunk group by dialling its directory number (DN). This selection should be turned OFF
when using LCR.

MICROPHONE

Allows keyset to be used in speakerphone mode.

OFF-HOOK RING

Allows a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call.

SMDR PRINT

When this is set OFF, C.O. calls to and from the station will not print
on SMDR. This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from
hold or park.

TGR ADV.TONE

When this feature is set to ON, a warning tone will be heard each
time LCR advances to the next route.

VMAA FORWARD

When this feature is set to ON, it allows calls to be forwarded to
voice mail.

STN CALL PRT

Allows print out of station to station call.

FWD DLY USE

When this feature is set to ON, calls will overflow to Forward No Answer destination when the Forward No Answer timer expires even
when the Forward No Answer feature is not activated at the called
party extension.
Set Forward No Answer destination in MMC 102, Call Forward, but
do not enable the feature. (Alternatively, use code 603 plus the station number, then code 600 to cancel the feature.)

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

MMC 300 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 300
Display shows

[201] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station
OR
Press ANS/RLS for all and press RIGHT soft key to
move cursor

[205] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON

Press UP or DOWN to select feature and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON

Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select ON/OFF and press RIGHT
soft key

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :OFF

Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2
Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 1
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

STN CALL PRT : OFF
FWD DLY USE : OFF
All other features set to ON

Related Items:

LCR programming

MMC 300 (Page 2 of 2)

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 301
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN STATION COS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to assign a day and night class of service to each station. A number of different classes of
service can be defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents—i.e. 30 for DCS/Compact II systems
(01–30), 10 for 816 systems (01–10) and four for 408/408i systems (1–4).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 301
Display shows

[201] STN COS
DAY:01 NIGHT:01

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP and DOWN to scroll through stations and press
RIGHT soft key to advance to step 3 to enter Day COS
OR
Press UP and DOWN to scroll through stations and press
LEFT soft key to advance to step 4 to enter Night COS
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all stations

[205] STN COS
DAY:01 NIGHT: 01

Enter day class of service (e.g., 05)
OR
Press UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service
and press RIGHT soft key to advance to step 4 to enter
Night COS
OR
Press UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service
and press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 to enter other
stations

[205] STN COS
DAY:05 NIGHT:01

Enter night class of service (e.g., 05)
OR
Press UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service
and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 to enter
other stations
OR
Press UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service
and press LEFT soft key to return to step 3

[205] STN COS
DAY:05 NIGHT: 05

Press TRSF to save and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Day class
Night class

= 01 (or 1)
= 01 (or 1)

Related Items:

MMC 701 Assign COS Contents
MMC 301 (Page 1 of 1)

OR
[ALL] STN COS
DAY:?? NIGHT:??

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 302
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

PICKUP GROUPS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. Maximum number of pickup groups is:
DCS and Compact II – 20
816 – 8
408/408i – 4
An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations can only be in one pickup
group at any given time.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 302
Display shows

[201] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP :01

Dial station number ( e.g., 205)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to select station number and
press RIGHT soft key
OR
Press ANS/RLS key to select all

[205] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP :01

Dial pickup group number (e.g. 04)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select group number

[205] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP :04

Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 to enter more
stations
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 3
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All stations = group 01

Related Items:

MMC 107 Key Extender
MMC 722 Station Key Programming
MMC 723 System Key Programming

MMC 302 (Page 1 of 1)

OR
[ALL] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP :??

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 303
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
3

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns BOSS stations to SECRETARY stations. One BOSS station can have up to four SECRETARY stations, and one SECRETARY station can have up to four BOSS stations.* A dedicated
BOSS key must be programmed on the SECRETARY keyset(s). A dedicated BOSS key must
also be programmed on the BOSS keyset(s).
*Note: For 408/408i systems, a BOSS station can have up to two SECRETARY stations, and vice versa.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS
“F”

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL
Key #24 (24B keyset) or key #12 (12B keyset) or key #6 (6B keyset) is used
to toggle BOSS/SECRETARY field

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 303
Display shows

BOSS STN:NONE
SECR 1:NONE

Dial BOSS station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT
soft key

BOSS STN :205
SECR 1:NONE

Dial SECRETARY station number (e.g., 201)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station
Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 3 to enter more
SECR numbers

BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:201

Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2 and continue
entries
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

MMC 722 Station Key Programming

MMC 303 (Page 1 of 1)

BOSS STN:205
SECR 2:202

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 304
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN STATION /
TRUNK USE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows trunks, on a per-station basis, to answer incoming calls, to dial out or to do both. If a station is set to DIAL:NO, the station will not have the ability to place a call. If the station is set to
ANS:NO, the station cannot answer an incoming call.
Note: MMC 406, Trunk Ring Assignment, overrides this MMC for the Answer option.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 304
Display shows

[201] USE [701]
DIAL:YES ANS:YES

Dial the station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press
RIGHT soft key

[205] USE [701]
DIAL:YES ANS:YES

Dial the trunk ID number (e.g., 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press
RIGHT soft key

[205] USE [704]
DIAL:YES ANS:YES

Press UP or DOWN key to select YES/NO option
OR
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT soft key
to move cursor to ANS option
Press UP or DOWN key to select YES/NO
Option
OR
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT soft key
to return to step 2

[205] USE [704]
DIAL:NO ANS:YES

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

DIAL = YES
ANS = YES

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

316
406
722
723

Copy Station Usable
Trunk Ring Assignment
Station Key Programming
System Key Programming

MMC 304 (Page 1 of 1)

[205] USE [704]
DIAL:NO ANS: NO

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 305
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN FORCED CODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the assignment of either account or authorisation codes on a per-station basis or on an
all-station basis.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to select ALL

FEATURE KEYS
0
1
2

NONE
AUTHORISE CODE
ACCOUNT CODE

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 305
Display shows

[201] FORCD CODE
NONE

Dial station number ( e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all stations

[205] FORCD CODE
NONE
OR

Dial a feature option 0–2 (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select option
and press RIGHT soft key to return step 2

[205] FORCD CODE
ACCOUNT CODE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 707 Authorisation Code
MMC 708 Account Code

MMC 305 (Page 1 of 1)

[ALL] FORCD CODE
?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 306
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

HOT LINE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows a station to make an automatic internal or external call upon the expiration of a timer (see
MMC 501, System-Wide Timers: ‘Off-Hook Select Timer’ option) to a predetermined number
when the handset is lifted. The number can be a maximum of 18 digits including pauses, flash
etc., in the dial string (the access code for a trunk is not counted).

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS
“B”
”C”
”D”
”E”

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL
Used to insert a flash code “F”
Used to insert a pause code “P”
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code “C”
Used to mask/unmask followi ng digits (shows as “[” or “]”)

Keys “A” to “F” are keys #19 to #24 on 24B keysets, or keys #7 to #12 on 12B keysets, or keys
#1 to #6 on 6B keysets.

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 306
Display shows
Press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor

[201] HOT LINE
NONE

Enter station number via dial keypad (e.g. 201)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press RIGHT
soft key

[201] HOT LINE
NONE

Enter station number to automatically dial via keypad
(e.g. 202)—or press UP or DOWN to select
OR

[201] HOT LINE
202

Enter a trunk to automatically dial (e.g. 701)—or press UP
or DOWN to select—then press the RIGHT soft key and
enter a maximum of 18 digits to dial.

[201] HOT LINE
701-01235987654_

Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

MMC 501 System-Wide Timers (Off-Hook Select Timer)

MMC 306 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 308
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN BACKGROUND
MUSIC SOURCE
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns a background music (BGM) source to keysets as follows.
DCS –There is a total of 19 possible music selections, but this is dependent on the number of
Trunk A cards that are installed in the system. Only one music source is provided per Trunk A
card. The system must have a Trunk A card installed to provide a BGM source. The default directory number of a BGM source is 3701–3719. (Internal music is always the odd numbered address, e.g. 3701, 3703.)
Compact II–There is a total of two possible music selections, but this depends on whether a
Misc card is installed in the system. One music source is provided on the base board (switch select internal/external); the other external source is provided on the Misc card. The default directory number of a BGM source is 371–372.
816 and 408/408i–There is a music source on the base board (switch select internal/external).
The default directory number of a background music source is 371.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 308
Display shows current setting

[201] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:NONE

Dial keyset number (e.g., 205)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through keyset numbers
and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all stations

[205] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:NONE
OR
[ALL] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:?

Enter source number (e.g., 3701)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[205] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:3701

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

MMC 309 Assign Station Music On Hold
MMC 408 Assign Trunk Music On Hold Source

MMC 308 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 309
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN STATION MUSIC
ON HOLD
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to select which Music On Hold (MOH) source can be heard on
each station. There are four possible selections for each music source: TONE, NONE, internal
and external (customer-provided MOH source).
DCS–The system must have a Trunk A card installed to provide a music source. There is a total
of 19 possible music selections, but this is dependent on the number of Trunk A cards in the system. Only one external music source is provided per Trunk A card. The default directory number
of a music source is 3701–3719. (Internal music is always the odd numbered address, e.g. 3701,
3703.)
Compact II– There is a total of two possible music sources, but this depends on whether a MISC
card is installed in the system. One music source is provided on the base board (switch select internal/external); the other external source is provided on the MISC card. The default directory
number of a background music source is 371–372. (Internal music is always address 371.)
816 and 408/408i–There is a music source on the base board (switch select internal/external).
The default directory number of a background music source is 371.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 309
Display shows current setting

[201] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:TONE

Dial keyset number (e.g., 205)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through keyset numbers and
press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all stations

[205] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:TONE

Enter source number (e.g., 371)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[205] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:371

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

OR
[ALL] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:?

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 308 Assign Background Music Source
MMC 408 Assign Trunk Music On Hold Source
MMC 309 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 310
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns the LCR class of service allowed for a station on a per-station basis. Eight classes (1–8)
can be assigned. (408/408i systems have four classes, 1–4.)
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 310
Display shows

[201] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 1

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select All stations

[205] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 1

Dial 1–8 to select class type (e.g. 3)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select class type and
press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[205] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 3

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Least Cost Routing COS 1

Related Items:

LCR programming

MMC 310 (Page 1 of 1)

OR
[ALL] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS ?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 311
DCS

✓

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN SIM PARAMETER
✗

CII

✗

816

✗

408i

✗

408

✗

Assigns and sets parameters for the serial interface module (SIM). Refer to tables 1–12, below.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 311
Display shows

[256] SIM PARA
SIM TYPE :DTE

Enter station number connected to SIM (e.g., 257)
from dial keypad
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[257] SIM PARA.
SIM TYPE :DTE

Enter desired selection from table 1 (00–10, e.g. 01)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[257] SIM PARA.
CALL MODE:AWITH

Refer to table 1 for your selected option and go to
the table indicated (e.g. 3) to enter required
value (e.g. 0) using dial keypad or by pressing UP or
DOWN key
Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[257] SIM PARA.
CALL MODE:MANUAL

Repeat step 3 for all required options (00–10 in table 1)

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

TABLE 1. SIM PARAMETER
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

SIM TYPE
CALL MODE
ANS MODE
AUTO BAUD
DTR CHECK
ECHO
PROTOCOL
SPEED
CHAR LENGTH
PARITY
STOP BIT

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12

MMC 311 [DCS] (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TABLE 2. SIM TYPE

TABLE 8. PROTOCOL

0
1
2
3

0
1

HOST
MODEM
DTE
PRT

V110
V120

TABLE 3. CALL MODE

TABLE 9. SPEED TABLE

0
1
2

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

MANUAL
AUTO WITH
AUTO WITHOUT

TABLE 4. ANS MODE
0
1

MANUAL
AUTO

300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
48000
56000

TABLE 5. AUTO BAUD

TABLE 10. CHAR LENGTH

0
1

0
1
2
3

OFF
ON

8
7
6
5

TABLE 6. DTR CHECK

TABLE 11. PARITY TABLE

0
1

0
1
2

OFF
ON

TABLE 7. ECHO
0
1

NONE
ODD
EVEN

TABLE 12. STOP BIT
OFF
ON

0
1
2

Default Data:

SIM Type = DTE
Call Mode = Manual
Ans Mode = Manual
Auto Baud = ON
DTR Check = ON
Echo = ON
Protocol = V110
Speed = 9600
Char Length = 8 Bits
Parity = None
Stop Bit = 1

Related Items:

MMC 804 System I/O Parameter

MMC 311 [DCS] (Page 2 of 2)

1
1.5
2

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 312
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ALLOW CLIP
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system installer or administrator to:
§

allow or prevent receipt of CLIP data from the network

request or restrict sending of CLIP data to the network.

Each station can have the following options:
SND:

YES
NO

- request the network to send Caller ID when outgoing call is made.
- request the network NOT to send Caller ID when outgoing call is made.

RCV:

YES
NO

- allow display of CLIP data at keysets.
- prevent display of CLIP data at keysets.

INFO: If YES selected for SND option, you can select the CLIP display option from
0 CO Tel
1 Extn. Number
2 CO + Extn. No.
3 DID Number.

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 312
Display shows

[201] ALLOW CLIP
RCV:YES SND:YES

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press right
soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all

[205] ALLOW CLIP
RCV:YES SND:YES
OR

Dial 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) to select RCV option (e.g. 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select option and press right
soft key to move cursor to SND field

[205] ALLOW CLIP
RCV:YES SND:YES

Dial 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) to select SND option (e.g. 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select option and press right
soft key

[205] ALLOW CLIP
RCV:YES SND:YES

If you selected YES for SND option, display shows

[205] ALLOW CLIP
INFO:C.O Tel.

Dial 0–3 to select INFO option
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select
Press RIGHT soft key

MMC 312 (Page 1 of 2)

[ALL] ALLOW CLIP
RCV:YES SND:YES

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
4.

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC

Default Data :

RCV=YES
SND=YES
INFO=CO Tel

Related Items:

MMC 119 Set CLIP Display

MMC 312 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 313
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN PIN CODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns individual users to PIN codes in the system. For Cable & Wireless 131 service there is a
maximum of four PIN codes allocated in the system, so users must be assigned to the PIN code
used when dialling out on a Cable & Wireless Network.
This MMC is related only to 131 Cable & Wireless service.

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 313
Display shows

[ 201] PIN CODE
PIN CODE # : NONE

Dial the station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station
and press RIGHT soft key to advance to step 3

[205] PIN CODE
PIN CODE # : NONE

Enter the pin code serial number (1, 2, 3 or 4, e.g. 1)

[205] PIN CODE
PIN CODE # : 1

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next
MMC

Default Data:

All stations are code #1

Related Items:

MMC 217 CCC Option
MMC 716 UK LCR Option
MMC 717 Pin Code

MMC 313 [Compact I] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 314
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL
7

CII

816

408i

408

Allows outgoing call restriction, disconnect or confirm with tone.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

FEATURE KEYS
0
1
2

NONE
CONFIRM TONE
DISCONNECT

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 314
Display shows

[201] CO CONFIRM
NONE

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] CO CONFIRM
NONE

Dial a feature option 0-2 (e.g., 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select option
and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[205] CO CONFIRM
CONFIRM TONE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

MMC 501 System-Wide Timers

MMC 314 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 315
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SET RELOCATION
7

CII

816

408i

408

Used when a station moves its phone to another location (a different port). All relevant data for
the phone are moved to the new location automatically.
ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 315
Display shows

SET RELOCATION
EXT
EXT

Dial the original station number (e.g. 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press
RIGHT soft key

SET RELOCATION
EXT205 EXT_

Dial the new location's station number (e.g. 210)

SET RELOCATION
EXT205 EXT210

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

None

MMC 315 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 316
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

COPY STATION USABLE
7

CII

816

408i

408

Copy the condition of station/trunk usability and station/station usability from one station to another station.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 316
Display shows

[201] CPY USABLE
FROM:NONE

Enter destination station number (e.g. 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] CPY USABLE
FROM:NONE

Enter the source station number (e.g. 210)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] CPY USABLE
FROM:210

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

MMC 304 Assign Station/Trunk Use
MMC 317 Assign Station/Station Use

MMC 316 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 317
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN STATION / STATION USE
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Used to control whether a station can dial other stations.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

(In the following example, you do not want station 205 to be able to dial station 204.)
1.

Open programming and select 317
Display shows

[201] USE [201]
DIAL:YES

Dial the first station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press
RIGHT soft key
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all stations

[205] USE [201]
DIAL:YES

Dial the second station number (e.g., 204)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press
RIGHT soft key

[205] USE [204]
DIAL:YES

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select YES/NO and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] USE [204]
DIAL:NO

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

DIAL=YES

Related Items:

MMC 316 Copy Station Usable

MMC 317 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 318
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

DISTINCTIVE RING
7

CII

816

408i

408

Sets a distinctive ring for stations. You can set both tone (T) and cadence (C) to one of eight ring
values (1-8), or to follow the station ring (F-STN).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 318
Display shows

[201] DIST.RING
T:F-STN C:F-STN

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select station and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

[205] DIST.RING
T:F-STN C:F-STN

Press UP or DOWN to select T value (e.g. 1) and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor to C field

[205] DIST.RING
T:1
C:F-STN

Press UP or DOWN to select C value
(e.g. 2)

[205] DIST.RING
T:1
C:2

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC

Default Data :

T: F-STN
C: F-STN

Related Items:

None

MMC 318 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 319

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

BRANCH GROUP
Not Used in the UK

MMC 319 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 400
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CUSTOMER ON/OFF
PER TRUNK
3

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns several options (listed below) on a per-trunk basis.
OPTIONS
0
1
2
3

1A2 EMULATE
TRUNK INC DND
TRUNK FORWARD
LCR ALLOW

Trunk override call (NO PRIVACY)
Allows trunk to override DND (DIL)
Allows trunk to be forwarded
Allows LCR to be switched ON/OFF when a
trunk is directly accessed.

Note: ‘1A2 Emulation’ means that a third party can be joined on an existing trunk conversation by pressing
the DTS key for the line on their keyset.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 400
Display show

[701] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:OFF

Dial trunk number (e.g. 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk
OR
Press ANS/RLS for all trunks and press RIGHT soft key
to move cursor to options

[704] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:OFF

Dial option number from above list (0–3, e.g. 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select option and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[704] TRK ON/OFF
TRK FORWARD :ON

Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select ON/OFF and press
RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[704] TRK ON/OFF
TRK FORWARD: OFF

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

1A2 EMULATE
TRUNK INC DND
TRUNK FORWARD
LCR ALLOW

Related Items:

None

Off
Off
On
Off

MMC 400 (Page 1 of 1)

OR
[ALL] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE :?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 401
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

C.O. / PBX LINE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to select the mode of the C.O. line. If PBX mode is chosen, this allows PBX access codes
to be recognised, thus allowing more complete toll restriction (call barring). This mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis. If a trunk requires the use of the RECALL key, it must be set to PBX
mode. Options are:
0
1

CO LINE
PBX

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 401
Display shows

[701] PBX LINE
CO LINE

Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through trunk numbers and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select ALL

[704] PBX LINE
CO LINE

Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for C.O.
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through options
Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[704] PBX LINE
PBX LINE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All trunks C.O. Line

Related Items:

None

MMC 401 (Page 1 of 1)

OR
[ALL] PBX LINE
?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 402
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TRUNK DIAL TYPE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to determine the dialling type of each C.O. line. There are two options:
0 Dual tone multi frequency (DTMF)
1 Pulse (rotary dial)
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 402
Display shows

[701] DIAL TYPE
DTMF TYPE

Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through trunk numbers and
press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select ALL

[704] DIAL TYPE
DTMF TYPE

Dial 1 for PULSE or 0 for DTMF (e.g. 1)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through options
Press RIGHT soft keys to return to step 2

[704] DIAL TYPE
DIAL PULSE TYPE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All trunks DTMF

Related Items:

MMC 501 System-Wide Timers
MMC 503 Trunk-Wide Timers

MMC 402 (Page 1 of 1)

OR
[ALL] DIAL TYPE
?

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 403
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TRUNK TOLL CLASS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns toll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis in a day or night condition.
The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of service defined in MMCs
702, Toll Deny Table, and 703, Toll Allowance Table. The toll classes available are listed below:
ENTRY NUMBER

CLASS TYPE

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

F-STN
CLS-A
CLS-B
CLS-C
CLS-D
CLS-E
CLS-F
CLS-G
CLS-H

DESCRIPTION
Follow station toll restriction
Follow toll class A (Unrestricted)
Follow toll class B
Follow toll class C
Follow toll class D
Follow toll class E
Follow toll class F
Follow toll class G
Follow toll class H (All restricted)

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 403
Display shows

[701] TOLL CLASS
D:F-STN N:F-STN

Dial trunk number (e.g.704)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through trunk numbers and
press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select ALL

[704] TOLL CLASS
D:F-STN N:F-STN

Enter day toll class (e.g. 2 for CLS-B)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to scroll through toll classes
and use RIGHT soft key to move the cursor

[704] TOLL CLASS
D:CLS-B N:F-STN

Enter night toll class (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to scroll through toll classes
and use RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[704] TOLL CLASS
D:CLS-B N:CLS-B

Press TRSF to store data and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store data and advance to next MMC

MMC 403 (Page 1 of 2)

OR
[ALL] TOLL CLASS
D:F-STN N:F-STN

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Default Data:

All trunks F-STN day/night

Related Items:

MMC 301 Assign Station COS
MMC 507 Assign Auto Night Time
MMC 701 Assign COS Contents
Toll Restriction

MMC 403 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 404
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TRUNK NAME
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows a name, up to 11 characters, to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to
the next position. For example, if the name is “TELECOMS”, press the number “8” once to get
the letter “T”. Now press the number “3” twice to get the letter “E.” Continue selecting characters
from the keypad to complete the name. Press the programmable “A” key to toggle between upper and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, then select the character.

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”

Used to scroll through options/move cursor left or right
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Key #19 (24B keyset) or key #7 (12B keyset) or key #1 (6B keyset)
toggles upper case and lower case text.

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 404
Display shows

[701] TRUNK NAME

Dial trunk (e.g., 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select trunk and press the
RIGHT soft key to move the cursor

[704] TRUNK NAME
_

Enter trunk name using the procedure described
above
Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[704] TRUNK NAME
TELECOMS

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

No names entered

Related Items:

MMC 104 Station Name
MMC 405 Trunk Number

MMC 404 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 405
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TRUNK NUMBER
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows a number, up to 11 digits, to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
Numbers are entered using the keypad. Pressing a key selects a digit and moves the cursor to
the next position.
The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 405
Display shows

[701] CO TEL NO.

Dial trunk (e.g., 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select trunk and press RIGHT
soft key to move the cursor

[704] CO TEL NO.
_

Enter the trunk number

[704] CO TEL NO.
3054264100

Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

No numbers entered

Related Items:

MMC 404 Trunk Name

MMC 405 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 406
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

CII

816

408i

408

Enables ringing to a specific station or a group of stations (or an auto attendant for systems other
than 408/408i) when incoming calls are received. This MMC controls both day and night locations.
DEVICE
Station
Station group
AA

DEFAULT DIRECTORY NO.
DCS
201–349
500-529
39xx

Compact II
201–308
500-519
38x

816
201–216
500–509
38x

408/408i
21–28
50–53
–

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL (trunks only)

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 406
Display shows

[701] TRK RING
D:500 N:500

Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through trunk numbers and
press the RIGHT soft key to move the cursor

[704] TRK RING
D:500 N:500

Dial station number or station group number for day
(e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station number or station group number and press RIGHT soft key to
move cursor

[704] TRK RING
D:205 N:500

Dial station number or station group number for night
(e.g., 501)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station number or station group number and press RIGHT soft key to
move cursor

[704] TRK RING
D:205 N:501

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All trunks day: 500, night: 500 (day and night=50 for 408/408i systems)

Related Items:

MMC 202 Change Feature Passcodes
MMC 507 Assign Auto Night Time
MMC 601 Assign Station Group
MMC 406 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 407
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a trunk
lock-up.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 407
Display shows

[701] TRK RELS.
RELEASE? Y:1,N:0

Dial in trunk number ( e.g., 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key selected trunk and press right
soft key
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all trunks

[704] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO (e.g. 1)

[704] TRK RELS.
RELEASE? Y:1,N:0

System returns to step 2
4.

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 603 Assign Trunk Group

MMC 407 (Page 1 of 1)

[ALL] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 408
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON
HOLD SOURCE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to select which Music On Hold (MOH) source can be heard on
each trunk. The possible selections for each music source are: TONE, NONE, internal and external (customer-provided MOH source).
DCS
Connected to a Trunk A card. The default directory number of an MOH source is 37xx.
Compact II
There is a total of two possible music sources, but this depends on whether a Misc card is installed in the system. One music source is provided on the base board (switch select internal/external); the other external source is provided on the Misc card. The default directory number of a background music source is 371–372.
816 and 408/408i
There is a music source on the base board (switch select internal/external). The default directory
number of a background music source is 371.
Note: Internal music is always the odd numbered address, e.g. 371, 3701, 3703.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 408
Display shows current setting

[701] TRK MOH
MOH SOURCE:TONE

Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through trunk
numbers and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select ALL

[704] TRK MOH
MOH SOURCE:TONE

Enter source number (e.g., 3701)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select option
Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 above

[704] TRK MOH
MOH SOURCE:3701

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

OR
[ALL] TRK MOH
MOH SOURCE:?

Default Data:

TONE

Related Items:

MMC 308 Assign Background Music Source
MMC 408 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 409
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TRUNK STATUS READ
3

CII

816

408i

408

This is a read-only MMC. Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the
servicing personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk.
OPTIONS
Dial

DCS

COMPACT II & 816 & 408/408i

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11

Port Number
Tenant Number
Type: e.g. LOOP, DDI, BRI, PRI …
1A2 Emulation Status (On/Off)
Trunk Forward Status (On/Off)
Line Type (CO/PBX)
Dial Type (DTMF/Dial Pulse)
Day Toll Restriction
Night Toll Restriction
Day Ring Destination
Night Ring Destination
MOH Source

Port Number
Type: e.g. LOOP, DDI, BRI, PRI …
1A2 Emulation Status (On/Off)
Trunk Forward Status (On/Off)
Line Type (CO/PBX)
Dial Type (DTMF/Dial Pulse)
Day Toll Restriction
Night Toll Restriction
Day Ring Destination
Night Ring Destination
MOH Source
DISA Status

DISA Status

–

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 409
Display shows (e.g. for Compact II)

[701] TRK STATUS
PORT NO::EX1-01

Enter trunk number via dial keypad (e.g., 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to advance cursor

[704] TRK STATUS
PORT NO::EX1-04

Enter desired option 00-12 from table above
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection

[704] TRK STATUS
1A2 EMULATE:OFF

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

MMC 409 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Default Data:

Related Items:

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Port Number=Trunk port number
Tenant No.=1
Type=Loop
1A2 Emulation=OFF
Trk Fwd=ON
Line Type=CO
Dial Type=DTMF
Day Toll=F–STN
Night Toll=F–STN
Day Ring Dest=500 (50 for 408/408i)
Night Ring Dest=500 (50 for 408/408i)
MOH Source=Tone
DISA Status=Normal
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

400 Customer On/Off Per Trunk
401 C.O./PBX Line
402 Trunk Dial Type
403 Trunk Toll Class
404 Trunk Name
406 Trunk Ring Assignment
408 Assign Trunk Music On Hold Source
410 Assign DISA Trunk

MMC 409 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 410
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system to have Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Because there is a possibility
that unauthorised calls will be made via this feature, several safeguards have been added. The
user must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls. DISA can lock out when a
predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are attempted. Callers will then receive ring
back tone until a programmable timer has expired. The [ key may be used to initiate new dial
tone while in a station-to-station call. The # key may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office line. Multiple central office calls and internal calls are possible.
Note: In order to use DISA, the caller must first dial a valid station number, followed by a four-digit passcode. This passcode is defined in MMC 101, Change User Passcode. DISA users MUST change this passcode as the default number cannot be used.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL (trunks)

FEATURE KEYS
0
1
2
3

NORMAL
DAY
NIGHT
BOTH

No DISA service
DISA is available in day mode
DISA is available in night mode
DISA is available in both day and night mode

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 410
Display shows

[701] DISA LINE
NORMAL

Dial trunk number ( e.g., 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press
RIGHT soft key
OR
Press ANS/RLS key to select all trunks

[704] DISA LINE
NORMAL

Dial an option (0–3) from above table
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and
press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[704] DISA LINE
NIGHT

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

OR
[ALL] DISA LINE
?

Default Data:

All trunks normal

Related Items:

MMC 101 Change User Passcode
MMC 500 System-Wide Counters
MMC 210 Customer On/Off (DISA PSWD option)

MMC 410 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 411

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
Not Used in UK

MMC 411 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 412
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows for the assignment of AC15 cards for proper signalling. This MMC is only for analogue
types of AC15 trunks. These trunks can also use the translation tables in MMC 714, DDI Number
and Name Translation. The AC15 trunks are allowed the use of translation tables via MMC 416,
Assign AC15 Translation. The signalling condition types are as follows:
0
1
2
3
4

IMMEDIATE START
DELAYED START
WINK START
NO ANSWER BACK
DIRECT BACK

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 412
Display shows

[701] TRK SIGNAL
IMMEDIATE START

Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all trunks

[705] TRK SIGNAL
IMMEDIATE START

Enter desired trunk type selection from above list
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

[705] TRK SIGNAL
WINK START

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All AC15 trunks set to IMMEDIATE START

Related Items:

MMC 714 DDI Number and Name Translation

MMC 412 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 414
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MPD/PRS SIGNAL
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used on a per-trunk basis to define if a C.O. line is to be either a Metering Pulse (MPD) or a Polarity Reversal Signal (PRS) trunk. (Note: PRS is not available in the UK.)
A Meter Pulse Trunk will detect a C.O.-provided meter pulse. A Polarity Reversal trunk will detect
the line reversal signal which may be provided by the C.O. when the other party answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call. If the trunk is designated as PRS detection, the call
duration timer will be started and the results printed on the SMDR record. PRS detection is also
essential for dropping a trunk-to-trunk conversation which is unsupervised by an internal party.

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 414
Display shows

[701] TRK PRS
NONE

Enter desired trunk number (e.g. 705)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and use
LEFT or RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[705] TRK PRS
NONE

Press UP or DOWN key to scroll through options
and use LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[705] TRK PRS
MPD

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

MMC 508 Call Cost

MMC 414 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 415
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

REPORT TRUNK
ABANDON DATA

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of abandoned
C.O. calls for which CLIP information has been collected on a per-trunk basis.
There are two options for this MMC:
0 REPORT : NO

Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will not be
printed on SMDR or stored in the system abandoned call list.
These records will continue to be stored in the station review list.

1 REPORT : YES

Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will be
printed on SMDR or stored in the system abandoned call list.
These records will also be stored in the station review list.

Note: In order for these abandoned call records to print on SMDR, use MMC 725 (SMDR Options) and set
Option 11 - Abandon Call - to YES.

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 415
Display shows

[701] TRK ABNDN
REPORT : YES

Dial trunk number (e.g. 705)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select trunk and use LEFT or
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[705] TRK ABNDN
REPORT : YES

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO (e.g. 0)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to scroll through options and use
LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[705] TRK ABNDN
REPORT : NO

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data :

REPORT: YES

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

119 Set CLIP Display
312 Allow CLIP
608 Assign CLIP Review Block
722 Station Key Programming
723 System Key Programming
725 SMDR Options
728 CLIP Translation Table

MMC 415 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MMC: 416 ASSIGN AC15 TRANSLATION
DCS

CII

816

408i

408

Provides an AC15 tieline with the ability to use DDI translation tables (MMC 714). Options are:
0 UNUSE DID TRANS
1 USE DID TRANS
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 416
Display shows

TIE XLATE
[701]
UNUSE DID TRANS

Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all trunks

[705] TIE XLATE
UNUSE DID TRANS

Dial 0 or 1 to select option (e.g. 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection

[ALL] TIE XLATE
USE DID TRANS

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

OR
[ALL] TIE XLATE
UNUSE DID TRANS

Default Data:

UNUSE DID TRANS

Related Items:

MMC 714 DDI Number and Name Translation

MMC 416 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 417
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

PRI CRC4 OPTION
3

CII

816

408i

408

This option is used to enable/disable CRC4 generation and checking. It is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only PCM30 framing. By default, the CRC option
is ON.
Note: After changing this option, MMC 418, Card Restart, must be used to restart the card to make the
change effective.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 417
Display shows

[701] PRI CRC4
ON

Enter first trunk number in PRI card (e.g. 701)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select first trunk number
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[701] PRI CRC4
ON

Enter 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft
key

[701] PRI CRC4
OFF

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

CRC4 ON

Related Items:

MMC 418 Card Restart

MMC 417 [DCS/Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 418
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CARD RESTART
3

CII

816

408i

408

Enables any changes you make in MMC 417 (PRI-CRC4 Option), MMC 419 (BRI Option), MMC
420 (PRI Option) or MMC 423 (S/T Mode) and applies them, as appropriate, to each BRI or PRI
card that you restart.
Note: PRI is not available on 816 or 408i systems.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 418
Display shows

[701] RESTART
CARD RESTART ? NO

Enter first trunk number in ISDN card (e.g. 701)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select first trunk number
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[701] RESTART
CARD RESTART ? NO

Press UP or DOWN key to select YES or NO and
press RIGHT soft key
(If you select NO, system returns to step 2)

[701] RESTART
CARD RESTART ? YES

You are asked to confirm your selection
Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT
soft key
(If you select YES, the card is restarted)

[701] RESTART
ARE YOU SURE ? YES

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

417
419
420
423

PRI CRC4 Option (DCS & Compact II)
BRI Option
PRI Option (DCS & Compact II)
S/T Mode

MMC 418 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 419
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

BRI OPTION
3

CII

816

408i

408

This MMC comprises two groups of items. One group is for the "TRUNK" ports as set in MMC
423, S/T Mode, and the other is for the "STATION" ports. Be aware that some items will not be
available on certain types of system.
Note: For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value for one of the
two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically.

Ports Programmed as "TRUNK" in MMC 423
Display shows "BRI-TRK". Items to select include some or all of the following: BRI MODE, CHANNEL
ANY, DLSEND and BRI CODING.
•

•

BRI MODE
P-P DDI:

When BRI line is point-to-point configuration and is a DDI line. Incoming calls
are placed as set in MMC 714 (DDI Number & Name Translation). All incoming
calls through the DDI trunk will be placed according to the setting of the DDI
table.

P-M NOR:

When BRI line is point-to-multipoint configuration and is not an MSN line Incoming calls are placed as set in MMC 406 (Trunk Ring Assignment)

P-M MSN:

When BRI line is point-to-multipoint configuration and is an MSN line. The sy stem can manage up to eight MSN numbers for each MSN BRI access. Incoming calls through P-MP MSN ports are handled as set in MMC 421 (MSN
Digit). Each BRI access requires its own table.

P-P NOR:

When BRI line is point-to-point configuration and is not a DDI line. Incoming
calls are placed as set in MMC 406 (Trunk Ring Assignment).

CHANNEL ANY
This field can be set to YES or NO and is referenced when a user attempts an outgoing call
while that port is busy.
If CHANNEL ANY is NO, user hears busy tone.
If CHANNEL ANY is YES, the system checks if the adjacent port (another B channel in the
same BRI access) is free. If it is free, the user can call through that port. Otherwise, the user
hears busy tone.

•

DLSEND
This field is provided to set the dial sending mode to "enblock" or "overlap" on an individual
port basis.

•

BRI CODING
A-LAW or U-LAW (A-LAW in UK)

Note: Any change to BRI MODE option is effective only after restart of the BRI card. Use MMC 418, Card Restart, to restart the card.

MMC 419 (Page 1 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Ports Programmed as "STATION" in MMC 423
Display shows "BRI-STN". Items to select include some or all of the following: CHANNEL ANY,
POWER FEED (see note) and BRI CODING.

•

CHANNEL ANY
(See above.)

•

POWER FEED
This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied (YES or NO).
Note:
1. Any change to The Power Feed option is effective only after restarting the BRI card. Use MMC 418 to
restart the card.
2. Only DCS (excluding Compact I) andCompact II systems provide a Power Feed option to the S0 Interface. (See Table 1 in the S0 Overview section of this manual (Part 3, Special Applications).)

•

BRI CODING
A-LAW or U-LAW (A-LAW in UK)

In BRI-STN, options DLSEND and BRI MODE are not included because the system uses implicit data
for these: enblock for DLSEND and P-MP for BRI MODE.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advanc e to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 419
Display shows

Dial BRI trunk number (e.g. 703)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select the port
For TRUNK ports (TRK), go to step 3.a
For STATION ports (STN), go to step 3.b

3.a

Display is as shown for TRUNK ports
Use the RIGHT soft key to position the cursor under
CHANNEL ANY

MMC 419 (Page 2 of 3)

[701] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY : YES
OR
[701] BRI-STN
CHANNEL ANY : YES

[703] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY : YES

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

3.a.1

Press UP or DOWN key to choose item (CHANNEL
ANY, BRI MODE, DLSEND, BRI CODING)
Press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor
Use UP or DOWN key to select option (e.g. P-P DDI for
BRI MODE)
If you press RIGHT soft key, cursor moves under trunk
number (step 3.a)
If you press LEFT soft key, cursor returns to option
(e.g. BRI MODE)

[703] BRI-TRK
BRI MODE:P-P DDI

3.a.2

For other items, repeat step 3.a.1

[703] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY : YES

3.a.3

For another port, repeat from step 2
When finished, go to step 4

3.b

Display is as shown for STATION ports

[703] BRI-STN
CHANNEL ANY : YES

3.b.1

Press UP or DOWN key to choose item: CHANNEL
ANY, POWER FEED (DCS/Compact II only), BRI CODING
Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and make selection

3.b.2

For other items, repeat step 3.b.1

3.b.3

For another port, repeat from step 2

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

CHANNEL ANY:
BRI MODE:
DLSEND:
POWER FEED:
BRI CODING:

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

418
421
423
714

YES
P-P DDI
OVERLAP
NO
A-LAW

Card Restart
MSN Digit
S/T Mode
DDI Number and Name Translation

MMC 419 (Page 3 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 420
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

PRI OPTION
7

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system DDI/NORMAL access and sets dial sending mode (DLSEND) on an individual
port basis to OVERLAP or ENBLOCK. However, if you change the dial sending mode of one port,
all other ports must be set to the same dial sending mode. If your PRI line is not registered for
DDI service at the Central Office, you can use NORMAL service (e.g. subaddress or normal trunk
incoming service). If you set PRI MODE to DDI, you can service DDI (Direct Dial Inward) to a specific station or station group according to DDI NUMBER TABLE.
There is also a CHANNEL ANY option. If set to YES, when a call is initiated the channel used is
specified by the network; if set to NO, when a call is initiated the DCS/Compact II will specify
which channel to use.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 420
Display shows

[701] PRI OPTION
CHANNEL ANY:YES

Dial PRI trunk number (e.g. 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select the port
Press the RIGHT soft key to move the cursor

[704] PRI OPTION
CHANNEL ANY:YES

Press UP or DOWN key to make selection (CHANNEL
ANY, PRI MODE or DLSEND) and press RIGHT soft
key to move the cursor

[704] PRI OPTION
DLSEND : OVERLAP

Use UP or DOWN key to make selection
and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[704] PRI OPTION
DLSEND : ENBLOCK

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

CHANNEL ANY:
PRI MODE:
DLSEND:

YES
DDI
OVERLAP

Related Items:

MMC 418 Card Restart
MMC 406 Trunk Ring Assignment
MMC 714 DDI Number and Name Translation

MMC 420 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 421
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MSN DIGIT
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station. If any entry in MSN
DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call's called party number, either the specific station is
alerted, if it is programmed to accept the call, or the call is cleared if it is programmed to reject
the call.
If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table, the operator is alerted.
You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select a call waiting option:
when a destination is busy, the incoming call must be cleared or camped-on to the station (which
is alerted to the call).
There is a total of eight entries on a trunk basis and each entry consists of the following fields:

DIGITS

Digits to be received (maximum of 10).

DAY DEST

Destination in day mode - can be a station or a station group.
Repeat (B) will be acceptable to the system if received digit is within
numbering plan for a station or station group.

NIGHT DEST

Destination in night mode - can be a station or a station group.
Repeat (B) will be acceptable to the system if received digit is within
numbering plan for a station or station group.

CALL WAIT

Toggles YES or NO: if YES then the call will be camped-on at busy
destination while NO gives busy indication.

OPTION

Accept: the selected destination party will be alerted.
Reject: the call is cleared.

Note: For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value for one of the
two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

MMC 421 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 421
Display shows

[701]MSN DGT (1)
DGT:

Enter trunk number (e.g. 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to scroll through ports
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[704]MSN DGT (1)
DGT:

Enter the location 1-8 (e.g. 4)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select location and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

[704]MSN DGT (4)
DGT:_

Enter digits to be translated (e.g. 4603881) via dial keypad and press RIGHT soft key to move to the destination
selection
(Max. digits is 10)

[704]MSN DGT (4)
DGT:4603881_

Enter day destination via dial keypad (e.g. 204)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

[704]MSN DGT (4)
ÕD:204
N:

Enter night destination via dial keypad (e.g. 202)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

[704]MSN DGT (4)
ÕD:204
N:202

Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO (for Call Waiting)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

[704]MSN DGT (4)
CW:NO OPT:ACEPT

Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT (for Option)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

[704]MSN DGT (4)
CW:NO OPT: ACEPT

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 419 BRI Option
MMC 420 PRI Option

MMC 421 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 422
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN TRUNK COS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to assign a day and night class of service (COS) to each trunk. For DCS and Compact II
systems there are 30 (01-30) different classes of service. For 816 systems there are 10 (01–10).
For 408/408i systems there are four (1–4). These are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents.
According to the assigned COS, an outside caller to the system via a DISA line without a passcode may have restricted access to system features.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 422
Display shows first trunk

[701] TRK COS
DAY:01 NIGHT:01

Dial trunk number (e.g. 705)
OR
Use UP and DOWN to scroll through trunks and press
RIGHT soft key
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all stations

[705] TRK COS
DAY:01 NIGHT: 01

Enter day class of service (e.g. 05)
OR
Use UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service
and press RIGHT soft key

[205] TRK COS
DAY:05 NIGHT: 01

Enter night class of service (e.g. 05)
OR
Use UP and DOWN to scroll through classes of service
and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[205] TRK COS
DAY:05 NIGHT: 05

Press TRSF to save and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

DAY CLASS: 01 (1)
NIGHT CLASS: 01 (1)

Related Items:

MMC 301 Assign Station COS
MMC 410 Assign DISA Trunk
MMC 701 Assign COS Contents

MMC 422 (Page 1 of 1)

OR
[ALL] TRK COS
DAY:?? NIGHT:??

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 423
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

S/T MODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to select the function of each BRI access. You can set a BRI access as "TRUNK" to which
an ISDN C.O. line is connected, or as "STATION" to which an ISDN terminal is connected.
For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value for one
of the two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically.
Note: Any change made in this MMC will take effect only after restarting the BRI card. Use MMC 418, Card
Restart, to restart the card.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 423
Display shows

[701] S/T MODE
TRUNK

Dial BRI trunk number (e.g. 703)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select the port
Use the RIGHT soft key to position the cursor
under TRUNK (or STATION)

[703] S/T MODE
TRUNK

Press UP or DOWN key to make selection (TRUNK
or STATION)
Press RIGHT soft key to position the cursor under
the port number again

[703] S/T MODE
STATION

For other ports, repeat steps 2 and 3

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

TRUNK

Related Items:

MMC 418 Card Restart
MMC 419 BRI Option
MMC 424 S0 Mapping

MMC 423 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 424
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

S0 MAPPING
3

CII

816

408i

408

Generates a table by which an ISDN terminal number is mapped onto a BRI STATION port.
For a detailed description and other MMC-related procedures, refer to BRI Related MMC Procedure in the S0 Overview section of this manual (see Part 3, "Special Applications").
Note: For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only map a number onto one of the
two ports. You can map only one port to each number. This means you can't use the same number in more
than one BRI access. However, more than one number can be mapped onto a port and used in a BRI access.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 424
Display shows

[7801]S0 MAPPING
NONE

Dial an ISDN terminal number (e.g. 7803)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select the number and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[7803]S0 MAPPING
NONE

Dial an ISDN station number (e.g. 703)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select the number and
press RIGHT soft key

[7803]S0 MAPPING
703

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

MMC 419 BRI Option
MMC 423 S/T Mode

MMC 424 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 426
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
7

CII

816

408i

408

This MMC procedure allows trunk gain control.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL trunks

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 426
Display shows

[701] TRUNK GAIN
RX : +0.0 TX : +0.0

Dial trunk number ( e.g., 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press
RIGHT soft key
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select ALL trunks

[704] TRUNK GAIN
RX : +0.0 TX : +0.0
OR
[ALL] TRUNK GAIN
RX : +0.0 TX : +0.0

Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk RX gain
and press RIGHT soft key

[704] TRUNK GAIN
RX : +1.0 TX : +0.0

Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk TX gain
and press RIGHT soft key

[704] TRUNK GAIN
RX : +1.0 TX : +1.0

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

RX=+0.0, TX=+0.0 dB for all trunks

Related Items:

None

MMC 426 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 427

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

R2MFC SIGNAL
Not Used in UK

MMC 427 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MMC: 428 ASSIGN TRUNK / TRUNK USE
DCS

CII

816

408i

408

Used to control whether an incoming trunk can dial calls for specific trunks. (In the following example, you don’t want trunk 705 to dial calls for 708.)
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 428
Display shows

[701] USE [702]
DIAL:YES

Dial the incoming trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press
RIGHT soft key
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all trunks

[705] USE [702]
DIAL:YES

Dial the trunk number (e.g., 708)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and press
RIGHT soft key

[705] USE [708]
DIAL:YES

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select YES/NO and press
RIGHT soft key

[705] USE [708]
DIAL:NO

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

DIAL=YES

Related Items:

None

MMC 428 (Page 1 of 1 )

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 500
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to set the values of the system counters. The counters are listed below with a brief description of each.
DIAL

COUNTER

DESCRIPTION

ALARM REMINDER

The number of times that an alarm reminder will ring a station
before cancelling. RANGE = 1–99.

AUTO REDIAL

The number of times the system will redial an outside number
after the auto redial feature has been activated. RANGE = 1–15.

DISA CALL

Sets the maximum number of internal calls that can be made
after accessing a DISA line. RANGE = 1–99.

DISA LOCK

Number of attempts the system will allow to incorrectly access a
DISA line before locking out the DISA line. RANGE = 1–99.

NEW CALL

Number of times the system will allow a user to signal New Call
on a C.O. line during one call. RANGE = 1–99.

UCDS VISUAL
ALARM*

Used to set the Visual Alarm threshold. It is triggered when the
number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group
reaches this value. RANGE = 0–25.

UCDS AUDIO
ALARM*

Used to set the Audio Alarm threshold. It is triggered when the
number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group
reaches this value. RANGE = 0–25

UCD CS LEVEL 1*

Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of calls waiting to
be answered in UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0–25.

UCD CS LEVEL 2*

Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of calls waiting to
be answered in UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0–25.

* Options 5–8 are not available on 408/408i systems.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

MMC 500 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 500
Display shows

ALARM REM.CNTER
05→

Enter number from above list (e.g., 6)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

UCDS VISUAL ALARM
00→_

Enter in new value via dial keypad
If entry is valid, system will return to step 2

UCDS VISUAL ALARM
00→02

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Alarm Reminder
Auto Redial
DISA Call
DISA Lock
New Call
UCDS Visual Alarm
UCDS Audio Alarm
UCD CS Level 1
UCD CS Level 2

5
5
99
3
99
0
0
0
0

Related Items:

MMC 501 System-Wide Timers

MMC 500 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 501
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the adjustment of individual system timers as necessary. Some timers can be disabled by
setting the time to all zeros (000).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 501
Display shows first timer value

AA INT DGT TIME
05 SEC →

Press UP or DOWN key to select timer (e.g. KMMC
Lock Out) and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

KMMC LOCK OUT TM
30 SEC → _

Enter new value using keypad
If valid, system returns to step 2

KMMC LOCK OUT TM
30 SEC → 255

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

See table of timers and values, below

Related Items:

None

MMC 501 (Page 1 of 6)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Timers
Note that some timers apply only to certain systems. These are indicated in the list.

TIMER NAME
AA INT DGT (not 408/408i)
AA NO ACT (not 408/408i)
AA TRANS (not 408/408i)
ALERT TONE
ALM REM.INTERVAL
ALM REM.RING OFF
ATT.RECALL
AUTO REDIAL INT.
AUTO REDIAL RLS.
BARGE-IN TONE INT
CALLBACK NO ANS
CAMP ON RECALL
CLIP DISPLAY (not 408)
CLIP MSG RECEIVE (not 408)
CO CLEAR (408 only)
CO CONFIRM
CO–CO DISCONNECT
CONFER TONE INT
CONFIRM TONE
CRD TONE INT (not 816 or 408/408i)
DIAL PASS
DISA DISCONNECT
DISA LOCK OUT
DISA NOANS DISC
DISA PASS CHECK
DISPLAY DELAY
DOOR LOCK RELEASE
DOOR RING DETECT
DOOR RING OFF
E-HOLD RECALL
EXT.FWD DELAY
FIRST DIGIT
HOK FLASH MAX
HOK FLASH MIN
HOOK OFF
HOOK ON
INQUIRY RELEASE
INTER DIGIT
KMMC LOCK OUT
LCR ADVANCE
LCR INTER DIGIT
MCL DELAY
OFF HOK RING INT
OFF HOOK SELECT
OHVA ANSWER
OVERLAP INT DGT (not 408)
PAGE TIME OUT
PAGE TONE

DEFAULT

RANGE

05 SEC
10 SEC
00 SEC
1000 MS
25 SEC
10 SEC
30 SEC
30 SEC
45 SEC
1300 MS
30 SEC
30 SEC
5 SEC
6 SEC
30 SEC
3 MIN
20 MIN
9900 MS
1000 MS
30 SEC
5 SEC
30 MIN
30 MIN
30 SEC
30 MIN
3 SEC
500 MS
50 MS
30 SEC
45 SEC
10 SEC
10 SEC
120 MS
80 MS
200 MS
200 MS
30 SEC
10 SEC
30 SEC
5 SEC
5 SEC
4 SEC
15 SEC
5 SEC
10 SEC
7 SEC
20 SEC
500 MS

1–25 SEC
1–25 SEC
0–25 SEC
100–2500 MS
1–255 SEC
1–25 SEC
1–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
100-9900 MS
1–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
1-25 SEC
1-25 SEC
0–255 SEC
0–255 MIN
0–255 MIN
100-9900 MS
100–2500 MS
1–255 SEC
1–25 SEC
1–255 MIN
1–255 MIN
0–255 SEC
1–255 MIN
1–255 SEC
100–2500 MS
10–250 MS
1–255 SEC
0–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
20–2500 MS
20–2500 MS
100–2500 MS
20–2500 MS
1–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
10–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
1-8 SEC
1–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
1 - 15 SEC
1–255 SEC
100–2500 MS

MMC 501 (Page 2 of 6)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

PARK RECALL
PC-MMC LOCK (not 408)
POWER DOWN
RECALL DISCONECT
RECALL WAIT
SMDR START/DP
SMDR START/DTMF
SYS HOLD RECALL
TRANSFER RECALL
UCDS AUDIO ALARM (not 408/408i)
UCDS VISUAL ALARM (not 408/408i)
VMS UCD MSG (816 only)
VOICE DIAL DELAY (not 816 or 408/408i)
R/D RING ON (not used)
R/D SIGNAL ON (not used)
PERI UCD REPORT (not 408/408i)

45 SEC
5 MIN
2000 MS
2 MIN
15 SEC
30 SEC
15 SEC
45 SEC
20 SEC
0 SEC
0 SEC
5 SEC
8 SEC
–
–
5 SEC

0–255 SEC
1–60 MIN
1000–9900 MS
1–255 MIN
1–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
1–255 SEC
0–255 SEC
0–255 SEC
0–255 SEC
0–255 SEC
1–99 SEC
5–15 SEC
–
–
3–99 SEC

Timer Descriptions
AA INT DGT: Controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before transferring call to INVLID
DEST as set in MMC 733 on a per-plan basis.
AA NO ACT: Time AA will wait for first digit for processing, after which call is transferred to the destination set in NO ACT DEST in MMC 733.
AA TRANS: After this time, compare input digit with AA translation table (MMC 732) and transfer to
destination.
ALERT TONE: Sets the duration of the attention tone preceding a call to a keyset in the Voice Announce or Auto Answer mode. This tone also precedes a forced Auto Answer call.
ALM REM INTERVAL: Controls the time between ring attempts at a station when alarm reminder is
set.
ALM REM RING OFF: Controls the length of the ring cycle when alarm reminder is set at a station.
ATT RECALL: The length of time a transfer recall will ring at a station before recalling the operator.
AUTO REDIAL INT: Controls the time between attempts after RETRY dialling is set on a station.
AUTO REDIAL RLS: Controls the duration of a Ring No Answer condition on a retry number dialled
before the auto redial is automatically cancelled.
BARGE-IN TONE INT: Controls the interval between the tones sent to the station being barged in
on.
CALLBACK NO ANS: Controls the time before the callback is automatically cancelled when a callback detects Ring No Answer.
CAMP ON RECALL: Controls how long a camped-on call will stay at a destination before recalling to
the transferring station.

MMC 501 (Page 3 of 6)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CLIP DISPLAY: The amount of time that the Calling Line ID information remains on the keyset’s display. While on a trunk conversation, users are allowed to review received CLIP by pressing SCROLL
à CLIP soft key, but LCD will automatically go back to trunk conversation status on expiration of this
timer.
CLIP MSG RECEIVE: The amount of time that the system will allow a valid message from the C.O.
C.O. CLEAR: The length of time a Direct Trunk Select key remains busy after cleardown.
CO CONFIRM: After this time, the outgoing call is disconnected or you can hear the confirm tone.
C.O.- C.O. DISCONNECT: Monitors the duration of an unsupervised conference; when it expires,
both trunks are disconnected.
CONFER TONE INT: Controls the intervals between the tones heard by the parties in a conference.
CONFIRM TONE: The tone heard when a feature is activated or deactivated.
CRD TONE INT: Controls the interval of the intermittent tone presented to station users whose calls
are being recorded using the Auto Record feature (see CADENCE documentation).
DIAL PASS: The wait time for preventing the misdialling of an outgoing call. After the last digit has
been dialled, the voice path is connected.
DISA DISCONNECT: Controls the maximum duration of a DISA call.
DISA LOCK OUT: Controls the time period for which a DISA call is not allowed to be made after the
DISA error counter has expired (MMC 500).
DISA NOANS DISC: Controls the time period after which a DISA call is disconnected if the call is not
answered.
DISA PASS CHECK: Defines the time period before the system clears the incorrect passcode
counter.
DISPLAY DELAY: Controls how long information is shown in the LCD. This timer also controls how
long error tone is heard.
DOOR LOCK RELEASE: Controls how long the door lock relay is activated.
DOOR RING DETECT: Controls the period of time before a call is answered by the door phone.
DOOR RING OFF: Controls the duration of ringing at the door ring destination before automatically
cancelling.
E-HOLD RECALL: Controls how long a call is held exclusively at a station before recalling. See ATT
Recall Time.
EXT. FWD DELAY: Controls the External Call Forward feature which allows a station to ring before
the call is placed on external call forwarding.
FIRST DIGIT: Controls how long the system will wait for dialling to begin before dropping the dial
tone and returning the user to error tone.
HOK FLASH MAX: Monitors the duration of a hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and
not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce (LONGEST DURATION).

MMC 501 (Page 4 of 6)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

HOK FLASH MIN: Monitors the duration of a hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and
not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce (SHORTEST DURATION).
HOOK OFF: Controls the time before dial tone is sent to a single line station.
HOOK ON: Sets the minimum amount of time that the system will recognise as an SLT hang up.
(Must be greater than HOK FLASH MAX.)
INQUIRY RELEASE: Monitors the duration of the action of the soft key to determine when to return
the LCD back to a normal status. This timer affects only display phones.
INTER DIGIT: Controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before dropping the call and
returning the user to error tone.
KMMC LOCK OUT: Controls the grace period between programming actions while in a programming session (KMMC not PCMMC). The timer automatically returns the system to secure programming status.
LCR ADVANCE: Controls the period of time before selecting the next allowable route when a station
is allowed to route advance.
LCR INTER DIGIT: Controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before dropping the call
and returning the user to error tone.
MCL DELAY: Controls the time when the system should start transmitting Authorisation Code after
sending MCL access code (Cable & Wireless 131 access).
OFF HOOK RING: Controls the duration of time between ring bursts to a user who has a camped-on
call.
OFF HOOK SELECT: Controls the grace period before placing a internal/external call as programmed in MMC 306.
OHVA ANSWER: Controls the duration of an OHVA call before automatic rejection. When a user receives OHVA with voice interrupt, this situation will last until this timer expires. If LCD phones receive
OHVA, REJECT will appear at righthand side of bottom line while this timer is activated.
OVERLAP INT DGT: Controls the grace period between receiving address information in overlap
receiving mode via BRI/PRI line. After expiration of this timer the system operator will be alerted.
PAGE TIME OUT: Controls the duration of a page announcement.
PAGE TONE: Controls the duration of tone burst heard over the page prior to the page announcement.
PARK RECALL: Controls the period of time a call is parked before recalling to the call park originator.
PC-MMC LOCK: Monitors PCMMC activity, drops the link if no action is created by PCMMC and returns the system to secure program status.
PERI UCD REPORT: Controls the interval between periodic UCD reports being output to the applicable port.
POWER DOWN: Sets the duration of disconnect signal for VM/AA ports.
RECALL DISCONNECT: The time an attendant recall rings before being disconnected. See ATT Recall Time.

MMC 501 (Page 5 of 6)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

RECALL WAIT: This is the time any recall (hold or transfer) continues to recall at your station before
it recalls to the operator.
SMDR START/DIAL PULSE (ROTARY): This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for rotary
dialling. This timer also controls the LCD duration timer on the keysets. The duration time displayed
and the SMDR time duration will be the same.
SMDR START/DTMF: This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for touchtone dialling. This
timer also controls the LCD duration timer on the keysets. The duration time displayed and the SMDR
time duration will be the same.
SYS HOLD RECALL: Determines the time calls can be left on hold before recalling the holding station. Setting timer to 000 means no recalling will take place.
TRANSFER RECALL: Determines the time that transferred calls ring before recalling. See Recall
Wait Time.
UCDS AUDIO ALARM: Determines how long the longest waiting call can be held before the system
gives an audio alarm to the UCD supervisor.
UCDS VISUAL ALARM: Determines how long the longest waiting call can be held before the system
gives a visual alarm to the UCD supervisor.
VMS UCD MSG: Not used in UK.
VOICE DIAL DELAY: Monitors the duration of the interaction between main software and Voice Dialler.

MMC 501 (Page 6 of 6)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 502
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

STATION-WIDE TIMERS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per-station basis or for all stations. It is
not advisable to change these values without assistance from Technical Support.
0

NO ANS FWD

This timer controls how long the station will ring before a Forward on
No Answer takes place. (Range: 001- 255 sec.)

1 DTMF DURATION

This timer governs the duration of DTMF digit which is transmitted to
an external VM system port. It is useful for customising a voice mail
system. (Range: 100 - 9900 msec.)

2 FIRST DGT DELAY

Thi s timer is valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable
delay for generating DTMF digits, for commencing in-band integration. (Range: 100 - 9900 msec)

Note: It is reasonable for the system administrator to use trial and error to find a suitable value for 1 and 2
above according to the characteristics of the selected VM system.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 502
Display shows

[201] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC →_

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station and press
RIGHT soft key
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all stations and press RIGHT
soft key

[205] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC →_

Enter new value (must be three digits) via dial keypad
(e.g., 020)
System will return to step 2

[205] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC →020

Dial timer number from above list (e.g. 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft
key to move cursor

[205] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS →_

Enter new timer value (must be four digits, e.g. 0200)
System returns back to step 2

[205] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS →0200

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

MMC 502 (Page 1 of 2)

OR
[ALL] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC →_

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Default Data:

NO ANS FWD
DTMF DURATION
FIRST DGT DELAY

015 sec
100 msec
600 msec

Related Items:

MMC 102 Call Forward
MMC 207 Assign VM/AA Port
MMC 726 VM/AA Options

MMC 502 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 503
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per-trunk basis or for all trunks. It is not advisable to change these values (with the exception of trunk flash time) without assistance
from Technical Support.
TIMER
ANS.BAK TM
CLEARING
CO SUPV TM
DTMF DURATION
FIRST DGT DELAY
FLASH TIME
NO RING TM
PAUSE TIME
PRS DET TM
RNG DET.TM
WINK TIME
MF/DP INT TM
MFR DLY TM

RANGE

DEFAULT

0100–2500 MSEC
0100–2500 MSEC
0100–2500 MSEC
0100–2500 MSEC
0100–2500 MSEC
0100–2500 MSEC
001–255 SEC
001–255 SEC
0000–2500 MSEC
0100–2500 MSEC
0100–0300 MSEC
0100–9900 MSEC
00–25 SEC

0600 MSEC
2000 MSEC
0400 MSEC
0100 MSEC
0600 MSEC
0070 MSEC
004 SEC
003 SEC
0000 MSEC
0300 MSEC
0200 MSEC
0800 MSEC
00 SEC

DIAL

408/408i
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
n/a
10
11

Other Systems
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 503
Display shows

[701] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS →

Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select trunk and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all trunks and press RIGHT soft
key to move cursor

[704] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS →

Dial timer number from above list
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select timer and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

[704] DTMF DUR.
0600 MS →_

Enter new timer value (must be four digits, e.g., 0700)
System returns to step 2

[704] DTMF DUR.
0600 MS →0700

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

See table above

Related Items:

None

MMC 503 (Page 1 of 1)

OR
[ALL] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS →

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MMC: 504 PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
DCS

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the value of pulses per second and the duration of the make/break time to be changed.
This only affects rotary dial trunks.
FEATURE KEYS
Dial 0
Dial 1

Make/Break ratio (01–99)
Pulse Per Second (10 or 20)

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 504
Display shows

MAKE/BREAK RATIO
33 MAKE→

Dial 0 or 1 for option (e.g. 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key for selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

PULSE PER SECOND
10 PPS →_

Dial in new value (e.g. 20) and system returns to step 2

PULSE PER SECOND
10 PPS →20

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Make/Break = 33
Pulses Per Second = 10

Related Items:

MMC 402 Trunk Dial Type

MMC 504 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 505
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system clock date and time to be set.
FEATURE KEYS
W
MM
DD
YY
HH
MM

Day
Month
Date
Year
Hour
Minute

0–6 (0:SUN, 1:MON, 2:TUE, 3:WED, 4:THU, 5:FRI, 6:SAT)
01–12
01–31
00–99 (e.g. 02 for 2002)
00–23
00–59

PROGRAM KEYS
KEYPAD
SPEAKER

Used to enter selections
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 505
Display shows system date and time

OLD: 1 1 1 0 2 9 9 : 1 1 4 7
NEW:WMMDDYY:HHMM

Enter new date and time using above table

OLD: 1 1 1 0 2 9 9 : 1 1 4 7
NEW:3 1 1 0 5 0 1 : 1 4 4 5

Verify time and date
Reenter if necessary

OLD: 3 1 1 0 5 0 1 : 1 4 4 5
NEW:WMMDDYY:HHMM

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Follows software version release date

Related Items:

None

MMC 505 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 506
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TONE CADENCE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Sets and changes tone cadences on a system-wide basis. There are 14 tones available, as listed
below. Tones can be set to ‘interrupt’ or ‘continuous’, and interrupt tone cadences can be customised. Some systems may require default settings to comply with local operating companies.
FEATURE KEYS
DIAL 0
DIAL 1

INTERRUPT TONE
CONTINUOUS TONE

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

TONES
BUSY TONE
CONFM/BARGE
DIAL TONE
DND/NO MORE
ERROR TONE
HOLD/CAMPON
MSGWAT TONE
RGBACK TONE
RING TONE
TRSFER TONE
DID RNGBACK
CO BUSY
CO RINGBACK
CO DIAL

Busy tone
Confirm tone and Barge-in tone
Dial tone
DND tone and No More Call key tone
Error tone
Hold tone and Camp-on tone
Message waiting tone
Ringback tone
Ring over page tone (to external page port)
Transfer dial tone
AC15 ringback tone (not 408 systems)
CO Busy tone
CO Ringback tone
CO Dial tone

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 506
Display shows

BUSY TONE
INTERRUPT TONE

Press UP or DOWN key to select tone (e.g. TRSFER)
and press RIGHT soft key

TRSFER TONE
INTERRUPT TONE

Dial 0 for INTERRUPT tone or 1 for CONTINUOUS
tone
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft
key

MMC 506 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

If you selected INTERRUPT tone, dial in new value(s)
for interrupt times (must be four digits each – sequence
on/off/on/off)
Press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor
Press LEFT soft key to retreat cursor
If valid entry, system returns to step 2

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

TRSFER TONE : 0100
0100 0100 0100

Default Data:
Tone

BUSY TONE
CONFIRM/BARGE-IN TONE
DIAL TONE
DND/NO MORE TONE
ERROR TONE
HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE
MESSAGE WAIT TONE
RING BACK TONE
RING TONE
TRANSFER TONE
DID RINGBACK
CO BUSY
CO RINGBACK
CO DIAL

350
50

On
350
50

Off
350
50

CONTINUOUS

250
100
500

250
100
3500

250
100
500

250
100
3500

CONTINUOUS

400
1000
100
1000
350
400
1000

Note: All times are in milliseconds.
Related Items:

Off

None

MMC 506 (Page 2 of 2)

200
3000
100
3000
350
200
250

400
1000
100
1000
350
400
1000

2000
3000
100
3000
350
2000
250

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 507
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN AUTO NIGHT TIME
3

CII

816

408i

408

Enters the system into night mode automatically by utilising time and day tables. A NIGHT key is
not needed as the system will switch automatically. (However, it is useful to have a dedicated key
so the status can be manually changed if necessary.) The start time is the time the system
switches from day to night service; the end time is when it switches back from night to day service (e.g., start 1730 WED, end 0800 THUR).
All times are entered in 24-hour clock format (e.g. 1730 is 5.30pm).
FEATURE KEYS
0
1
2
3

SUN
MON
TUE
WED

4
5
6

THU
FRI
SAT

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 507
Display shows

NIGHT TIME (SUN)
ST:
END:

Dial day number (0–6 e.g., 3)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select day and press RIGHT
soft key to advance cursor

NIGHT TIME (WED)
ST:
END:

Dial in start time for night (e.g. 1730)
If time entered is valid, cursor moves to end time
Enter end time (e.g. 0800)
If time entered is valid, system returns to step 2

NIGHT TIME (WED)
ST:1730 END:0800

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 722 Station Key Programming
MMC 723 System Key Programming

MMC 507 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 508
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CALL COST
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system during a
call. This information can be displayed on the keyphone LCD during a call or as an SMDR record.
Attributes are as follows:
0 UNIT COST PER MP

When the system is installed to receive MP on a C.O. outgoing call. It
is used for generating total call cost by multiplying it by the number
of pulses. Allows a maximum value of 5000.

1 CALL COST RATE

This generates additional call cost calculated by multiplying this rate
by the original call cost. Ranges from 100 to 255.

WARNING
•
•

Changing a value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost.
This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk card. It is not available on the standard product.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 508
Display shows

UNIT COST PER MP
0200PENCE→

Dial 0 or 1 (e.g. 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key for selection and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

CALL COST RATE
100% →_

Enter new value (e.g. 110 for 110 percent)
System returns to step 2

CALL COST RATE
110% →

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

UNIT COST PER MP
CALL COST RATE

200 pence
100 percent

Related Items:

MMC 110 Station On/Off
MMC 414 MPD/PRS Signal

MMC 508 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 509
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

C.O. TONE CADENCE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows customising of the tone cadence provided from the analogue trunk on a system-wide basis. There are three types of tone available through this MMC. The control of the tone cadence
may be changed from interrupt tone to continuous tone. Some DCS systems may require default
settings to comply with local operating companies. These tones are mainly used for performing
Automatic Redial depending on call progress tones on request from internal users on a trunk
call.
Once busy tone is detected from the Central Office, the call is automatically released and is
queued for redial after expiration of the Auto Redial Interval timer (see MMC 501).

FEATURE KEYS
DIAL 0
DIAL 1

INTERRUPT TONE
CONTINUOUS TONE

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

TONES
BUSY TONE
RINGBACK TONE
DIAL TONE
ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 509
Display shows

CO BUSY TONE
INTERRUPT TONE

Press UP or DOWN key to select tone
Press LEFT soft key and advance to step 3

CO RGBACK TONE
CONTINUOUS TONE

Dial 0 for INTERRUPT tone or 1 for CONTINUOUS
tone
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft
key

CO RGBACK TONE
INTERRUPT TONE

CO RGBACK T : 0400
0200 0400 0200

MMC 509 [Compact I] (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
5.

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:
Tone
BUSY TONE
DIAL TONE
RINGBACK TONE

Off

350
1000
400

350
250
200

350
1000
400

350
250
200

Note: All times are in milliseconds
Related Items:

None

MMC 509 [Compact I] (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 510
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SLI RING CADENCE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to set ring cadence for SLI ports. Options are:
1
2
3
4
5

Station ring
Trunk ring
Door ring
Alarm ring
Callback ring

Cadence values are displayed in the sequence: on / off / on / off. Contact Technical Support for
advice before changing any of these values.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 510
Display shows

1: STN RING : 1000
3000 1000 3000

Dial option 1–5 (e.g. 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT
soft key

2: TRK RING : 0400
0200 0400 3000

Enter new value(s) for cadence (4 digits per value)
as required

2: TRK RING : 0400
0200 0400 2000

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

On
1= 1000
2= 0400
3= 0400
4= 0200
5= 0200

Related Items:

None

Off
3000
0200
0100
0200
0200

On
1000
0400
0400
0200
0200

Off
3000
3000
2000
2000
4000

MMC 510 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 511
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MW LAMP CAD
(Cadence)
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Sets the cadence for the message waiting LED on single line telephones, for systems which have
a message waiting card installed.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 511
Display shows

MW LAMP CADENCE
ON: 1000
OFF:1000

Enter value for ON followed by value for OFF
(enter all four digits)

MW LAMP CADENCE
ON: 2000
OFF:2000

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

ON
OFF

Related Items:

None

1000 (msec)
1000 (msec)

MMC 511 [DCS / Compact II CADENCE] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 512
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN HOLIDAY
7

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns holiday dates to a station for the current year. Station will remain in Night Service for
those periods assigned. Up to 60 dates may be entered.
Date format: MMDD (Month/Day, e.g. 25th December would be “1225”).

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 512
Display shows

ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01:

Press UP or DOWN key to select option 01–60
and press RIGHT soft key

ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01: _

Enter date in format MMDD

ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01: 1225

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

None

MMC 512 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MMC: 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
DCS

CII

816

408i

408

Used to assign the operator group for day and night.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 600
Display shows

OPERATOR GROUP
D: 500
N: 500

Dial day operator group (e.g. 501)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press
RIGHT soft key

OPERATOR GROUP
D: 501
N: 500

Dial night operator group (e.g. 501)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press
RIGHT soft key

OPERATOR GROUP
D: 501
N: 501

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Day=500 (50 for 408/408i)
Night=500 (50 for 408/408i)

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

211
406
601
602

Door Ring Assignment
Trunk Ring Assignment
Assign Station Group
Station Group Name

MMC 600 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 601
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN STATION GROUP
3

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns stations to groups. This provides more flexibility, for example, if using Uniform Call Distribution (UCD/ACD), AA GROUP and VM/AA applications. A station, common bell, and ring page
can be in more than one group, but must all be the same ring type. The maximum members per
group for each system is:
DCS
48

816
16

Compact I/Compact II
30

408/408i
8

Note: A device for announcement, if used, must provide a hookflash and return the call to the group.

UCD GROUPS
Maximum number of UCD groups that can be programmed is as follows.
DCS:10, created from last 10 station groups (520–529)
Compact I—10, created from any station group (501–529)
Compact II – 5, created from the last 10 station groups (510–519)
816 – 3, created from the last 3 station groups (507–509)
GROUP TYPES
0
1
2
3
4

NORMAL GROUP
VMAA GROUP*
UCD GROUP*
AA GROUP*
CADENCE*

Can only have distribute or sequential ringing
Has wrap-up capability
Can only have distribute or sequential ringing
Can only have distribute or sequential ringing

(* Options not available on 408/408i systems)
Other possible entries for DCS systems only are:
3801–3820 COM. BELL

This device is a common bell relay on a Trunk A card.

3601–3640 RING PAGE

This device is ring over an external page zone output of a Trunk A
card.

FEATURE KEY
0
1
2
3
4
5

TYPE
RING
OVERFLOW
GRP TRSF
NEXT PORT
MEMBER

Group type (Normal, VM/AA, UCD, AA)
Ring mode (see Ring Modes, below)
Overflow time
Group transfer time
Overflow port
Group member (e.g., station 202)

RING MODES
0

SEQUENTIAL

The first idle station listed in the group will ring. If the first is
busy, the next idle station will ring.

DISTRIBUTE

The first call will ring the first station listed in the group. The next
call will ring the next station listed in the group.

MMC 601 (Page 1 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

UNCONDITION

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

All the stations listed in the group will ring. (Busy stations will receive off-hook ring, if set in MMC 300.) The maximum number of
stations allowed to ring unconditionally for a group is: DCS= 32,
Compact II=10, 816=16, 408/408i=8.

Note: When a group is called, or a caller is transferred to a group, ringback is sent to the caller. A busy signal will not be returned even if all group members are busy. Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any stations in the group.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 601
Display shows

[501] STN GROUP
TYPE:NORMAL GRP

Dial group number (e.g., 505)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select group and press LEFT
soft key to move cursor to type of group

[505] STN GROUP
TYPE:NORMAL GRP

Dial group type 0–4 (e.g., 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
LEFT soft key to move cursor to ‘TYPE’

[505] STN GROUP
TYPE:VMAA

Dial feature option number (0–5, e.g., 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[505] STN GROUP
RING:SEQUENTIAL

Dial ring option (0–2, e.g., 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
LEFT soft key to move cursor back to RING or press
RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[505] STN GROUP
RING:DISTRIBUTE

Dial next feature option and continue
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select option
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2

[505] STN GROUP
RING:DISTRIBUTE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Group Type:
Ring Mode:
Overflow:

Normal
Uncondition
000 Sec

Grp Trsf:
Next Port:
Grp Member:

MMC 601 (Page 2 of 3)

000 Sec
None
01: (first station)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

203
204
211
212
406
602

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Assign UA Device
Common Bell Control
Door Ring Assignment
Alarm Ringing Station
Trunk Ring Assignment
Station Group Name

MMC 601 (Page 3 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 602
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

STATION GROUP NAME
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system installer or administrator to enter a name, up to 11 characters, to identify an
individual station group. Names are written using the keypad. Pressing a key selects a character
and moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the name is “SAMSUNG," press the
number “7” four times to get the letter “S.” Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A.”
Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete the name. Press the programmable
”A” key to toggle between upper and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, then select the character.

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 602
Display shows

[501] SGR NAME

Dial group number (e.g., 505)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
LEFT or RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[505] SGR NAME
_

Enter the name using method described above

[505] SGR NAME
SAMSUNG

Press LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

104
404
600
601

Station Name
Trunk Name
Assign Operator Group
Assign Station Group

MMC 602 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 603
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups. This is very
useful for programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several dialling plans. There
are two different modes of operation: (1) sequential and (2) distribute.
WARNING: One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk
member from other groups to prevent accidental access.
The number of trunk groups is:
DCS and Compact II — 11: valid groups are 9 and 80–89.
816 — Four: valid groups are 9 and 80–82.
408/408i — Two: valid groups are 9 and 8.
Valid number of members of trunk groups are:
DCS:
01–80
Compact I:
01–10
Compact II:
01–40
816:
01–10
408/408i:
1–4
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 603
Display shows (e.g. trunk group 9)

[9] TRK GROUP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL

Enter in valid trunk group (see above)(e.g. 81)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to advance cursor

[81] TRK GROUP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL

Press RIGHT soft key to change mode
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to change mode to member

[81] TRK GROUP
MEMBER 01:NONE

Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor to number of
member and enter valid member number (e.g. 04) via
dial keypad
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[81] TRK GROUP
MEMBER 04:NONE

MMC 603 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Enter valid trunk number (e.g., 729)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

Repeat steps 1–5 to remove trunk from group 9 (or
group 0) if necessary

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

[81] TRK GROUP
MEMBER 01:729

Default Data:

MODE=SEQUENTIAL
All trunks are in group 9 and/or 80 (group 9 only for 408/408i)

Related Items:

LCR programming
Tenant programming (DCS only)

MMC 603 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 604
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN STATION TO
PAGE ZONE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the assignment of a keyset to any of the internal paging zones 1 to 4 and All page (page
plus ∗). The total number of keysets that can receive a page is limited to 80 (DCS) or 40 (Compact II) or 12 (816) or 4 (408/408i). A keyset may be assigned to more than one zone.
The assignment is controlled by the use of class marks. If a keyset is flagged as “1” in a zone
column, it will receive pages for that zone. If the keyset is flagged as “0,” it will not receive pages
for that zone. Keysets can receive pages for more than one zone.
Note: 408/408i systems are assigned internal page zones 1–2 only. Therefore, only these zones can be
flagged as “1”. Zones 3 and 4 are flagged as “0.”

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 604
Display shows

ENTRY:STN :1 2 3 4∗
01:NONE:0 0001

Enter index number (01–80 or 01–40 or 01–12 or 1–4
depending on your system–see above) via keypad
(e.g., 04)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

ENTRY:STN :1 2 3 4∗
04:NONE:00001

Enter station number (e.g., 205) via dial keypad
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

ENTRY:STN :1 2 3 4∗
04:205 :00 0 0 1

Move cursor under page zone desired (e.g. 2) by pressing UP or DOWN key and enter the digit 1 under the
zone
Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 to continue with
entries

ENTRY:STN :1 2 3 4∗
04:205 :010 0 1

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

No stations assigned
All zone is set (∗ )

Related Items:

None

MMC 604 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 605
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE
ZONE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Determines which relays will close when one of the external page zones 5 to 8 is accessed. (816
and 408i/408 systems have only one external page zone—see below.)
DCS–The system must be equipped with a Trunk A card to allow external paging. Each Trunk A
card is equipped with two external page relays. The page relays have default DNs of 360X (e.g.
3601)
Compact II–One external page zone is located on the base board. Three are located on the optional MISC card. The page relays have default DNs of 36x (e.g. 361)
816/408i/408–One external page zone (zone 5) is located on the base board. The page relay has
a default DN of 361. The optional port is 362 (see MMC 219).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 605
Display shows first page zone (Note: Member number
shows as 1 or 01 etc, depending on system)

EXT. PAGE ZONE:(5)
MEMBER 1:NONE

Dial page zone number (e.g., 6)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to select desired page zone numbers
and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor

EXT. PAGE ZONE:(6)
MEMBER 1:NONE

Dial member number (e.g., 3 or 03)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to select member numbers
and press RIGHT soft key to move the cursor
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2

EXT. PAGE ZONE:(6)
MEMBER 3:NONE

Dial relay number via dial keypad (e.g., 362 or 3602)
and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 3

EXT. PAGE ZONE:(6)
MEMBER 3:362

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 219 Common Relay Service Type

MMC 605 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 606
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides a means of adding/deleting speed dial blocks to/from the system or individual keysets.
With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial, these need not be wasted on such items
as voice mail, SIMs and DPIMs, or on stations that do not require the ability to use speed dialling.
The ‘Free List’ shows ho w many blocks are left to be assigned. One block has 10 entries. The
number of blocks you can assign to system speed dials will depend on the maximum allowed
per system.
DCS has a maximum of 1500 entries in a system: a maximum of 500 (50 blocks) can be assigned as system speed dials, and the rest (100 blocks) can be allocated as personal speed dials with a maximum of 5 blocks per station.
Compact I has a maximum of 500 entries in a system (50 blocks): all of these can be allocated to
system speed dials or they can be used as personal numbers with a maximum of 5 blocks per
station.
Compact II has a maximum of 600 entries in a system: a maximum of 500 (50 blocks) can be
assigned as system speed dials, and the rest (10 blocks) can be allocated as personal numbers
with a maximum of 5 blocks per station.
816 has a maximum of 500 entries in a system: a maximum of 300 (30 blocks) for system speed
dials while the rest (20 blocks) can be allocated as personal numbers with a maximum of 5
blocks per station.
408/408i has a maximum of 300 entries in a system: a maximum of 200 (20 blocks) for system
speed dials while the rest (10 blocks) can be allocated as personal numbers with a maximum of
50 per–station.
The options you can select are:
SYSTEM (to set system speed dials)
EXT (to set individual extension speed dials)
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
TRSF

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear entry
To exit programming

MMC 606 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 606
Display shows (for example)

FREE LIST:60
SYSTEM:20

Press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor to next line

FREE LIST:60
SYSTEM:20

Press UP or DOWN key to select SYSTEM or EXT (extension)

FREE LIST:60
SYSTEM:20

If you select EXT, go to step 4
If you select SYSTEM, press RIGHT soft key and enter
valid number of blocks to assign
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT soft
key
OR
Press HOLD to delete block(s)
System returns to this step to make another selection
(If finished go to step 6)
4.

Enter desired EXT (extension) number via dial keypad
(e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to advance cursor

FREE LIST:60
EXT205:1

Enter valid number for blocks (0–5)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
OR
Press HOLD key to delete block(s)

FREE LIST:60
EXT205:5

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

System: 200 entries/20 blocks (100 entries/10 blocks for 408/408i)
Stations: One block of 10 entries

Related Items:

MMC 705 Assign System Speed Dial
MMC 706 System Speed Dial By Name

MMC 606 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 607
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

UCD OPTIONS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the UCD group assigned in MMC 601 to have more specific values for several attributes.
If UCD GROUP has not been programmed in the system, you may be presented with a warning
and not allowed to enter this MMC.
OPTION
DIAL 0

FIRST MSG – first message on AA card when no agents are available to answer calls.

DIAL 1

SECOND MSG – second message on AA card when no agents are available
to answer calls.

DIAL 2

EXIT CODE – routes the queued call to the Final Destination assigned in this
MMC (see below). This must be dialled while 1st or 2nd MSG is active.

DIAL 3

RETRY COUNT – second message will be cycled with MOH until this counter
value is reached.

DIAL 4

FINAL DESTINATION - if the call is not answered by the time RETRY COUNT
time is reached, it will be routed over this destination. If you press the “A”
key (#19 on 24B keyset, #7 on 12B keyset, or #1 on 6B keyset) you can enter an AA Plan number.

DIAL 5

RING NEXT – specifies how long ringing at an agent will last. After this time,
ringing stops, the agent is logged-out from the group and ringing starts at
the next idle agent.

DIAL 6

UCD RECALL – determines length of MOH between MSGs.

DIAL 7

MOH SOURCE – specifies MOH source to be presented to the caller.

DIAL 8

WRAP-UP – no calls are presented during this period.

DIAL 9

AUTO LOGOUT – disables the auto logout option when the RING NEXT
timer is set.

RANGE
FIRST MSG:
SECOND MSG:
EXIT CODE:
RETRY COUNT:
FINAL DESTINATION :
RING NEXT:
UCD RECALL:
MOH SOURCE:
WRAP–UP:
AUTO LOGOUT:

01 - 64
01 - 64
NONE, 0–9, *, #
00 - 99
NONE, STATION, STATION GRP, AA PLAN NO ( 01 - 12 )
00 – 99 sec
00 - 99 sec
TONE, NONE, Port No.
000 – 250 sec
YES/NO

MMC 607 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 607
Display shows

[501]UCD GROUP
FIRST MSG : 61

Dial UCD group number (e.g. 502)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select number
Press RIGHT soft key

[502]UCD GROUP
FIRST MSG : 61

Dial option number from above list (e.g. 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select option
Press RIGHT soft key

[502]UCD GROUP
SECOND MSG : 62

Enter new value using dial keypad (e.g. 01)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select value
Press RIGHT soft key

[502]UCD GROUP
SECOND MSG : 01

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:
FIRST MSG:
SECOND MSG:
EXIT CODE:
RETRY COUNT:
FINAL DEST:
RING NEXT:
UCD RECALL:
MOH SOURCE:
WRAP–UP:
AUTO LOGOUT:
Related Items:

61
62
None
03
500
30 sec
10 sec
Tone
10 sec
No

MMC 601 Assign Station Group

MMC 607 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 608
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN CLIP REVIEW
BLOCK
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides a means of adding or deleting CLIP review blocks (or ‘bins’) to an individual keyset.
With the ability to delete a block (or blocks), it will not be necessary to waste these on such items
as voice mail and DPIMs, or on keysets that do not have displays. The FREE value displayed
shows how many blocks are left to be assigned. The system automatically assigns 1 block of 10
numbers to each keyset. Each keyset may be assigned a maximum of 5 blocks (50 numbers).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 608
Display shows

[201] REVIEW BLK
10 : 0180 FREE

Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Use UP and DOWN to select station and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

[205] REVIEW BLK
10 : 0180 FREE

Enter number of entries (e.g., 50)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select
OR
Press HOLD key to delete bin(s)

[205] REVIEW BLK
50 : 0140 FREE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

One block of 10 entries

Related Items:

None

MMC 608 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 700
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

COPY COS CONTENTS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows you to copy a selected class of service (COS) to another COS. This is useful, for example,
if you want to create a similar COS to that being copied but want to change a few selected options within that COS. This MMC allows you to enter MMC 701, Assign COS Contents, in order to
make any changes you require. If you want to create a completely new COS, use MMC 701.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
“F”

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Key #24 (24B keyset) or key #12 (12B keyset) or key #6 (6B keyset)
is used to advance to MMC 701

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 700
Display shows

COPY COS ITEMS
COS 01→COS 01

Dial selected COS to copy (e.g., 05)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select COS and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor and advance to next
step

COPY COS ITEMS
COS 05→COS 01

Dial target COS (e.g., 06)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select COS and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor back to step 2

COPY COS ITEMS
COS 05→COS 06

To make changes to COS options, press “F” key
to advance to MMC 701 (Assign COS Contents)
OR
Go to step 5 if no changes are required

COS CONTENTS(06)
TOLL LEVEL:A

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 701 Assign COS Contents

MMC 700 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 701
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
3

CII

816

408i

408

MMC 701 is used to create a new class of service (COS). If you want to make a copy of an existing COS, use MMC 700. If an ‘unsupervised conference’ feature is allowed, a programmed
CONF key must be available to allow reentry into a conference call.
For an overview of toll restriction (call barring), refer to Part 3 of this manual ("Special Applications").
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

TOLL LEVEL OPTIONS
DIAL DIGIT

TOLL LEVEL

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 701
Display shows

COS CONTENTS(01)
TOLL LEVEL:A

Dial COS (e.g., 06)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select COS and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

COS CONTENTS(06)
TOLL LEVEL:A

Dial toll level (e.g. 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select option

COS CONTENTS(06)
TOLL LEVEL:C

Press RIGHT soft key to advance to COS options

COS CONTENTS(06)
000:AA CALER:YES

Use tables and data below to set options
5.

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

MMC 701 (Page 1 of 7)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

The following COS Feature Lists (1–4) are for DCS, Compact II, 816 and 408/408i systems respectively.

1. DCS : COS FEATURE LIST BY OPTION NUMBER
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
012
013
015
016
017
019
020
021
022
023
025
026
027
028
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062

AA CALER
ALM CLR
AUTO RDL
CALLBACK
CLIP ABN
CLIP INQ
CLIP INV
CONFER
DALM CLR
DAY/NIG.
DIRECT
DND
DND OVRD
DOOR
DSS
DTS
EXT FWD
FEATURE
FLASH
FOLLOW ME
FORWARD
GRP I/O
HOLD
HOT LINE
INTERCOM
MESSAGE
MM PAGE
NEW CALL
OHVAED
OHVAING
ONEA2
OPERATOR
OUT TRSF
OVERRIDE
PAGE 0
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
PAGE 6
PAGE 7
PAGE 8
PAGE 9
PAGE Q
PICKUP
SECURE
SSPD TOL
STN LOCK
STNGRP 01
STNGRP 02
STNGRP 03
STNGRP 04
STNGRP 05
STNGRP 06
STNGRP 07
STNGRP 08
STNGRP 09

Auto answer control by caller
Alarm sensor ring answer
Retry on busy
Callback
CLIP abandoned
CLIP inquiry for review
CLIP investigate
Conference
DISA alarm ring clear
Change day/night mode
Directory dial
Do Not Disturb
DND Override
Door ring answer
Direct station select
Direct trunk select
External call forward
Feature key
Trunk flash
Follow Me call forward
Call forward
Group in/out
Hold
Hot line
Intercom call
Message
Meet me page
New call
Ohvaed
Ohvaing
1A2 emulation
Operator
Outgoing transfer
Executive Override
Page zone 0 PAGING
Page zone 1 PAGING
Page zone 2 PAGING
Page zone 3 PAGING
Page zone 4 PAGING
Page zone 5 PAGING
Page zone 6 PAGING
Page zone 7 PAGING
Page zone 8 PAGING
Page zone 9 PAGING
Page zone QPAGING
Call pickup
Override secure
System speed dial toll check
Station locking
Station group 01 calling
Station group 02 calling
Station group 03 calling
Station group 04 calling
Station group 05 calling
Station group 06 calling
Station group 07 calling
Station group 08 calling
Station group 09 calling

MMC 701 (Page 2 of 7)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110–111
112

STNGRP 10
STNGRP 11
STNGRP 12
STNGRP 13
STNGRP 14
STNGRP 15
STNGRP 16
STNGRP 17
STNGRP 18
STNGRP 19
STNGRP 20
STNGRP 21
STNGRP 22
STNGRP 23
STNGRP 24
STNGRP 25
STNGRP 26
STNGRP 27
STNGRP 28
STNGRP 29
STNGRP 30
–
SYS SPD
TRKGRP01
TRKGRP02
TRKGRP03
TRKGRP04
TRKGRP05
TRKGRP06
TRKGRP07
TRKGRP08
TRKGRP09
TRKGRP10
TRKGRP11
UNCO CNF
VM AREC
VM AME
VM REC
VM STN01
VM STN02
VM STN03
VM STN04
VM STN05
VM STN06
VM STN07
VM STN08
–
ABSENCE

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001
Station group 10 calling
Station group 11 calling
Station group 12 calling
Station group 13 calling
Station group 14 calling
Station group 15 calling
Station group 16 calling
Station group 17 calling
Station group 18 calling
Station group 19 calling
Station group 20 calling
Station group 21 calling
Station group 22 calling
Station group 23 calling
Station group 24 calling
Station group 25 calling
Station group 26 calling
Station group 27 calling
Station group 28 calling
Station group 29 calling
Station group 30 calling
Not used
System speed dial
Trunk group 01 calling
Trunk group 02 calling
Trunk group 03 calling
Trunk group 04 calling
Trunk group 05 calling
Trunk group 06 calling
Trunk group 07 calling
Trunk group 08 calling
Trunk group 09 calling
Trunk group 10 calling
Trunk group 11 calling
CO to CO conference
Voice mail automatic call record
Voice mail answering machine emulation
Voice mail manual call record
Voice mail station 01
Voice mail station 02
Voice mail station 03
Voice mail station 04
Voice mail station 05
Voice mail station 06
Voice mail station 07
Voice mail station 08
Not used
Absence

2. COMPACT II : COS FEATURE LIST BY OPTION NUMBER
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
012

AA CALER
ALM CLR
AUTO RDL
CALLBACK
CLIP ABN
CLIP INQ
CLIP INV
CONFER
DALM CLR
DAY/NIG.
DIRECT
DND

MMC 701 (Page 3 of 7)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
013
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074–084
085
086
087
088

DND OVRD
DOOR
DSS
DTS
–
EXT FWD
FEATURE
FLASH
FOLLOW ME
FORWARD
–
GRP I/O
HOLD
HOT LINE
INTERCOM
MESSAGE
MM PAGE
NEW CALL
OHVAED
OHVAING
ONEA2
OPERATOR
OUT TRSF
OVERRIDE
PAGE 0
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
PAGE 6
PAGE 7
PAGE 8
PAGE 9
PAGE Q
PICKUP
SECURE
SSPD TOL
STN LOCK
STNGRP 01
STNGRP 02
STNGRP 03
STNGRP 04
STNGRP 05
STNGRP 06
STNGRP 07
STNGRP 08
STNGRP 09
STNGRP 10
STNGRP 11
STNGRP 12
STNGRP 13
STNGRP 14
STNGRP 15
STNGRP 16
STNGRP 17
STNGRP 18
STNGRP 19
STNGRP 20
–
SYS SPD
–
TRKGRP01
TRKGRP02

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001
DND Override
Door ring answer
Direct station select
Direct trunk select
Not used
External call forward
Feature key
Trunk flash
Follow Me call forward
Call forward
Not used
Group in/out
Hold
Hot line
Intercom call
Message
Meet me page
New call
OHVAed
OHVAing
1A2 emulation
Operator
Outgoing transfer
Executive Override
Page zone 0 PAGING
Page zone 1 PAGING
Page zone 2 PAGING
Page zone 3 PAGING
Page zone 4 PAGING
Page zone 5 PAGING
Page zone 6 PAGING
Page zone 7 PAGING
Page zone 8 PAGING
Page zone 9 PAGING
Page zone QPAGING
Call pickup
Override secure
System speed dial toll check
Station locking
Station group 01 calling
Station group 02 calling
Station group 03 calling
Station group 04 calling
Station group 05 calling
Station group 06 calling
Station group 07 calling
Station group 08 calling
Station group 09 calling
Station group 10 calling
Station group 11 calling
Station group 12 calling
Station group 13 calling
Station group 14 calling
Station group 15 calling
Station group 16 calling
Station group 17 calling
Station group 18 calling
Station group 19 calling
Station group 20 calling
Not used
System speed dial
Not used
Trunk group 01 calling
Trunk group 02 calling

MMC 701 (Page 4 of 7)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110–111
112

TRKGRP03
TRKGRP04
TRKGRP05
TRKGRP06
TRKGRP07
TRKGRP08
TRKGRP09
TRKGRP10
TRKGRP11
UNCO CNF
VM AREC
VM AME
VM REC
VM STN01
VM STN02
VM STN03
VM STN04
VM STN05
VM STN06
VM STN07
VM STN08
–
ABSENCE

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001
Trunk group 03 calling
Trunk group 04 calling
Trunk group 05 calling
Trunk group 06 calling
Trunk group 07 calling
Trunk group 08 calling
Trunk group 09 calling
Trunk group 10 calling
Trunk group 11 calling
CO to CO conference
Voice mail automatic call record
Voice mail answering machine emulation
Voice mail manual call record
Voice mail station 01
Voice mail station 02
Voice mail station 03
Voice mail station 04
Voice mail station 05
Voice mail station 06
Voice mail station 07
Voice mail station 08
Not used
Absence

3. 816 : COS FEATURE LIST BY OPTION NUMBER
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
012
013
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038

AA CALER
ALM CLR
AUTO RDL
CALLBACK
CLIP ABN
CLIP INQ
CLIP INV
CONFER
DALM CLR
DAY/NIG.
DIRECT
DND
DND OVRD
DOOR
DSS
DTS
–
EXT FWD
FEATURE
FLASH
FOLLOW ME
FORWARD
–
GRP I/O
HOLD
HOT LINE
INTERCOM
MESSAGE
MM PAGE
NEW CALL
OHVAED
OHVAING
ONEA2
OPERATOR
OUT TRSF
OVERRIDE
PAGE 0

MMC 701 (Page 5 of 7)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
039
040
041
042
043
044–047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063–083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090–096
097
098–099
100

PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
–
PAGE Q
PICKUP
SECURE
SSPD TOL
STN LOCK
STNGRP 01
STNGRP 02
STNGRP 03
STNGRP 04
STNGRP 05
STNGRP 06
STNGRP 07
STNGRP 08
STNGRP 09
STNGRP 10
–
SYS SPD
–
TRKGRP01
TRKGRP02
TRKGRP03
TRKGRP04
–
UNCO CNF
–
ABSENCE

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001
Page zone 1 PAGING
Page zone 2 PAGING
Page zone 3 PAGING
Page zone 4 PAGING
Page zone 5 PAGING
Not used
Page zone QPAGING
Call pickup
Override secure
System speed dial toll check
Station locking
Station group 01 calling
Station group 02 calling
Station group 03 calling
Station group 04 calling
Station group 05 calling
Station group 06 calling
Station group 07 calling
Station group 08 calling
Station group 09 calling
Station group 10 calling
Not used
System speed dial
Not used
Trunk group 01 calling
Trunk group 02 calling
Trunk group 03 calling
Trunk group 04 calling
Not used
CO to CO conference
Not used
Absence

4. 408/408i : COS FEATURE LIST BY OPTION NUMBER
408i
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

408
02
03
–
–
–
04
05
06
07
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

AUTO RDL
CALLBACK
CLIP ABN
CLIP INQ
CLIP INV
CONFER
DALM CLR
DAY/NIG.
DIRECT
DND
DND OVRD
DOOR
DSS
DTS
EXT FWD
FEATURE
FLASH
FOLLOW ME
FORWARD
GRP I/O
HOLD
HOT LINE
INTERCOM
MESSAGE
MM PAGE
NEW CALL
OHVAED

Retry on busy
Callback
CLIP abandoned (408i only)
CLIP inquiry for review (408i only)
CLIP investigate (408i only)
Conference
DISA alarm ring clear
Change day/night mode
Directory dial
Do Not Disturb
DND Override
Door ring answer
Direct station select
Direct trunk select
External call forward
Feature key
Trunk flash
Follow Me call forward
Call forward
Group in/out
Hold
Hot line
Intercom call
Message
Meet me page
New call
OHVAed

MMC 701 (Page 6 of 7)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
408i
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
41
42–45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55–81
82
83
84
85–93
94
95

408
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
–
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52–78
79
80
81
82–90
91
92

OHVAING
ONEA2
OPERATOR
OUT TRSF
OVERRIDE
PAGE 0
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
PAGE 5
–
PAGE Q
PICKUP
SECURE
SSPD TOL
STN LOCK
STNGRP 01
STNGRP 02
STNGRP 03
STNGRP 04
–
SYS SPD
TRKGRP01
TRKGRP02
–
UNCO CNF
ABSENCE

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

OHVAing
1A2 emulation
Operator
Outgoing transfer
Executive Override
Page zone 0 PAGING
Page zone 1 PAGING
Page zone 2 PAGING
Page zone 5 PAGING
Not used
Page zone Q PAGING
Call pickup
Override secure
System speed dial toll check
Station locking
Station group 01 calling
Station group 02 calling
Station group 03 calling
Station group 04 calling
Not used
System speed dial
Trunk group 01 calling
Trunk group 02 calling
Not used
CO to CO conference
Absence

Default Data:

Toll Level: all COS=A
Features: OVERRIDE=NO, all others=YES

Related Items:

MMC 700 Copy COS Contents
MMC 702 Toll Deny Table
MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table
Toll Restriction

MMC 701 (Page 7 of 7)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 702
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TOLL DENY TABLE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Makes toll restriction (call barring) easy and flexible. There are 500 entries for DCS (001–500),
200 entries for Compact II and 816 (001–200), and 100 entries for 408/408i (001–100) allowed in
the Deny Table. Each entry index, up to 12 digits, can be assigned to a class of service. With the
use of wild cards (see MMC 704, Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards can be used repeatedly in the dial string, limited only to what is allowed or
denied in MMC 704. There are six toll levels, B to G, that are programmable. Toll level A is set as
unrestricted by default and toll level H is set as internal calls only by default.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

WILD CARD KEYS
Key No.
(Depends on keyset type)

Wild Card

19 (24B) or 7 (12B) or 1 (6B)
20 (24B) or 8 (12B) or 2 (6B)
21 (24B) or 9 (12B) or 3 (6B)

X
Y
Z

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 702
Display shows

DENY(001):BCDEFG
:0 0 0 0 0 0

Dial entry number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select index and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor and enter toll
pattern via dial pad (e.g., 212)
OR
Enter wild card (e.g., 21X) and press RIGHT soft key to
move cursor to COS options

DENY(005):BCDEFG
:0 0 0 0 0 0

Press UP or DOWN key to move cursor along line until
under toll class mark (e.g., E)
Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT soft key
to return to step 1
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2

DENY(001):BCDEFG
212
:0 0 0 1 0 0

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All entries are set to 0

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

301
701
703
704

Assign Station COS
Assign COS Contents
Toll Allowance Table
Assign Wild Character
MMC 702 (Page 1 of 1)

DENY(005):BCDEFG
212
:0 0 0 0 0 0
DENY(005):BCDEFG
21X
:0 0 0 0 0 0

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 703
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Makes toll restriction (call barring) easy and flexible. There are 500 entries for DCS (001–500),
200 entries for Compact II and 816 (001–200), and 100 entries for 408/408i (001–100) permitted
in the Allowance Table. Each entry index, up to 12 digits, can be assigned to a class of service.
With the use of wild cards (see MMC 704, Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into
toll restriction. There are six toll levels, B to G, that are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default, and toll level H is set as ‘internal calls only’ by default.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

WILD CARD KEYS
Key No.
(Depends on keyset type)

Wild Card

19 (24B) or 7 (12B) or 1 (6B)
20 (24B) or 8 (12B) or 2 (6B)
21 (24B) or 9 (12B) or 3 (6B)

X
Y
Z

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 703
Display shows

ALOW(001):BCDEFG
:0 0 0 0 0 0

Dial entry number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select index and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor and enter toll pattern
via dial pad (e.g., 212)
OR
Enter wild card (e.g., 21X) from above list and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor to COS options.

ALOW(005):BCDEFG
:0 0 0 0 0 0

Press UP or DOWN key to move cursor along line until
under toll class mark (e.g., E)
Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT soft
key to return to step 1
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2

ALOW(001):BCDEFG
212
:0 0 0 1 0 0

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All entries are set to 0

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

301 Assign Station COS
701 Assign COS Contents
702 Toll Deny Table
704 Assign Wild Character
MMC 703 (Page 1 of 1)

ALOW(005):BCDEFG
212
:0 0 0 0 0 0
ALOW(005):BCDEFG
21X
:0 0 0 0 0 0

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 704
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides flexibility to toll restriction (call barring) when a specific numbering plan is desired.
There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table if needed.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 704
Display shows

:0123456789Q #
X:111111111111

Press UP or DOWN key to select X, Y, or Z
and press RIGHT soft key to advance cursor to
option line

:0123456789Q #
X:111111111111

Press UP or DOWN key to move cursor to digit(s)
desired (0–#, e.g. 5) and enter 1 or 0 as required

:0123456789Q #
X:111110111111

Press LEFT or RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 to
make more selections if required
4.

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All X, Y & Z =1

Related Items:

MMC 702 Toll Deny Table
MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table

MMC 704 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 705
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN SYSTEM
SPEED DIAL
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allow you to assign system speed dialling numbers. The number of entries available for programming is 500 (DCS and Compact II), or 300 (816), or 200 (408/408i)—see MMC 606, Assign
Speed Block. Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code (e.g. 9) followed by a separator (–) and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dialled digits can be 0–9, Q and
#. If the system recognises a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert
the separator.
System speed dials are numbered as follows:
DCS
Compact II
816
408/408i

500–999
500–999
500–799
500–699

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“B”
”C”
”D”
”E”
”F”

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to insert a flash code "F"
Used to insert a pause code "P"
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code "C"
Used to mask/unmask following digits - shows as "[" or "]"
Used to toggle to MMC 706 and enter name for speed dial no.

Keys “A” to “F” are keys #19 to #24 on a 24B keyset, or keys #7 to #12 on a 12B keyset, or
keys #1 to #6 on a 6B keyset
ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 705
Display shows

SYS SPEED DIAL
500:

Enter the speed dial required (e.g., 505)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

SYS SPEED DIAL
505:

Enter access code (e.g., 9) plus the phone number up
to 24 digits (digits will scroll under)

SYS SPEED DIAL
505:9–121223456789

Press “F” key to toggle to MMC 706 (step 3) to enter a
speed name for this number
OR
Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 to enter
another speed dial number

SYS SPEED NAME
505:_

MMC 705 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
5.

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 606 Assign Speed Block
MMC 706 System Speed Dial By Name

MMC 705 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 706
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
BY NAME
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows a name, up to 11 characters, to be entered for each system speed dial number you set
up. This name enables the number to be located when using the directory dial feature. The directory dial feature allows the display keyset user to select a speed dial number by searching for the
name.
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to
the next position. For example, if the name is “SAM SMITH”, press the number “7” four times to
get the letter “S”. Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A” Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete your name. Press the programmable “A” key to toggle between
upper and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, then select the character.

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
TRSF
“A”
”F”

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to store and exit MMC
Key #19 (24B keyset), or key #7 (12B keyset), or key #1 (6B keyset)
toggles upper and lower case text
Used to toggle to MMC 705

Keys “A” to “F” are keys #19 to #24 on a 24B keyset, or keys #7 to #12 on a 12B keyset, or
keys #1 to #6 on a 6B keyset

MMC 706 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 706
Display shows

SYS SPEED NAME
500:

Dial system speed entry number (e.g., 505)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select entry number
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

SYS SPEED NAME
505:

Enter name using dial keypad and
press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

SYS SPEED NAME
505:TELECOMS

OR
Press the “F” key to return to MMC 705
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

No names

Related Items:

MMC 606 Assign Speed Block
MMC 705 Assign System Speed Dial

MMC 706 (Page 2 of 2)

SYS SPEED DIAL
505:

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 707
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

AUTHORISATION CODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows you to set up authorisation codes on a per-class of service basis. Number of available entries is:
DCS:
Compact I & II:
816:
408/408i:

250 (001–250)
100 (001–100)
30 (01–30)
10 (01–10)

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 707
Display shows

AUTHOR.CODE(001)
CODE:
COS:01

Dial code entry number (see above) including any
leading zeros (e.g., 05 or 005)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to selected index number and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

AUTHOR.CODE(005)
CODE:
COS:01

Enter authorisation code (maximum four digits) via dial
keypad (e.g., 1234) and press RIGHT soft key to move
cursor

AUTHOR.CODE(005)
CODE:1234
COS:01

Enter class of service number 01–30 (e.g., 05)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select COS and press RIGHT
soft key to select and return to step 2

AUTHOR.CODE(005)
CODE:1234
COS:05

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 305 Assign Forced Code

MMC 707 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 708
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACCOUNT CODE

CII

816

408i

408

Allows you to set up account codes. The number of available entries for each system is:
DCS:
Compact I:
Compact II & 816:
408/408i:

500
250
200
100

(001–500)
(001–250)
(001–200)
(001–100)

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 708
Display shows

ACCOUNT CODE
001:

Dial code entry number (see above) (e.g., 005)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to selected index number and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

ACCOUNT CODE
005:

Enter account code (maximum 12 digits) via dial keypad

ACCOUNT CODE
005:123456789012

Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor back to step 2 to
Enter another code
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 305 Assign Forced Code

MMC 708 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 709
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

PBX ACCESS CODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides a way of identifying the access codes needed to work toll restriction (call barring) when
the system is used with either a PBX or CENTREX-supplied dial tone (PBX ACCESS CODE option). Maximum number of entries allowed:
DCS/CII/816: 5
408/408i: 2
Also provides a way of identifying the access codes needed to work toll restriction when operating special C.O.-provided functions (SPECIAL CODE option)—a maximum of 10 entries is allowed
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEY S
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 709
Display shows

PBX ACCESS CODE
1:

Enter 0 for PBX ACCESS CODE or 1 for SPECIAL
CODE
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

PBX ACCESS CODE
1:

Enter code index number (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

PBX ACCESS CODE
2:_

Enter via dial keypad the desired access/feature code
(max. 4 digits, e.g., 9)

PBX ACCESS CODE
2:9

Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 3 and enter
another index
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 702 Toll Deny Table
MMC 703 Toll Allowance Table

MMC 709 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 710
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

LCR DIGIT TABLE
3

CII

816

408i

408

The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR TIME TABLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. Maximum number of entries is:
DCS & Compact II
500

816
300

408 & 408i
100

Digit string length is 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains entered digit strings
in numerical order. The characters Q and # are also accepted for use with feature codes.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 710
Display shows

LCR DIGIT (001)
DIGIT:

Dial LCR entry (see above) (e.g., 005)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select entry and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

LCR DIGIT (005)
DIGIT: _

Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and press
RIGHT soft key
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 1

LCR DIGIT (005)
DIGIT:305426

Enter digit length (00–31)
Cursor will move to RT (route selection)
Enter RT (1–16)
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to length value
Valid entry will return you to step 1

LCR DIGIT (005)
LENGTH:10 RT:01

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Depends on software version

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

210 Customer On/Off
400 Customer On/Off Per Trunk
711 LCR Time Table
712 LCR Route Table
713 LCR Modify Digit Table

MMC 710 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 711
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

LCR TIME TABLE
3

CII

816

408i

408

This table gives flexibility to the system, through the LCR ROUTES, to allow calls placed at any
given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available. When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE
is allowed, it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks on any given time of
day. There are four possible time entries per day; the start time of the next time period is the end
time of the previous time period.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

FEATURE KEYS
DAY

DIAL

SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT

0
1
2
3
4
5
6

TIME
BAND
A
B
C
D

DIAL

LCRT

DIAL

0
1
2
3

LCRT
LCRT
LCRT
LCRT

1
2
3
4

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 711
Display shows

LCR TIME (SUN:A)
HHMM: 0000 LCRT:1

Dial day of week (SUN–SAT, e.g., WED)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to make day selection and press
RIGHT soft key

LCR TIME (WED:A)
HHMM: 0000 LCRT:1

Dial time band (A–D, e.g., B)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press RIGHT
soft key

LCR TIME (WED:B)
HHMM: 0000 LCRT:1

Dial time via keypad (24-hour clock format, e.g. 0800)
Cursor moves to LCRT

LCR TIME (WED:B)
HHMM:0800 LCRT: 1

Dial entry 1–4
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select entry and press RIGHT
soft key

LCR TIME (WED:B)
HHMM:0800 LCRT: 2

MMC 711 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
6.

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Systems can work 24 hours a day and 7 days a week with this default –
DAY
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

TIME BAND
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B

TIME

LCRT

0000
2359
0000
2359
0000
2359
0000
2359
0000
2359
0000
2359
0000
2359

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

210 Customer On/Off
400 Customer On/Off Per Trunk
710 LCR Digit Table
712 LCR Route Table
713 LCR Modify Digit Table

MMC 711 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 712
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

LCR ROUTE TABLE
3

CII

816

408i

408

The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the completion of
an outgoing call. This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE, LCR TIME TABLE, LCR
COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE. After the user dials a valid digit string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific predetermined trunk group. A maximum of
16 routes are available beginning with ROUTE NUMBER 1. If more than one trunk group is available for call completion, the system uses the first designated trunk group and then starts to utilise succeeding trunk groups. If all trunk groups are busy in a selected route, call queue becomes
active and allocates trunks as they become available.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 712
Display shows

LCR ROUTE (01:1)
C:1 G:9
M:001

Dial LCR ROUTE index number 1–16 (e.g., 05)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to selected index and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

LCR ROUTE (05:1)
C:1 G:9
M:005

Dial TIME BAND index number 1–4 (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to selected index and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:1
G:NONE M:---

Dial LCR COS number 1–4 (e.g., 4)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to selected COS and press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor

LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4
G:NONE M:---

Dial TRUNK GROUP access code (e.g., 9)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to selected access code
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4
G:9
M:---

Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number 001–100
(e.g., 050)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to selected index number
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
OR
Press RIGHT soft key to leave entry unchanged

LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4
G:9
M:050

MMC 712 (Page 1 of 2)

LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4
G:9
M:---

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
7.

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:
ROUTE
01–16
Related Items:

TIME BAND
1
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

COS
1

TRK GRP
9

310 LCR Class Of Service
710 LCR Digit Table
711 LCR Time Table
713 LCR Modify Digit Table

MMC 712 (Page 2 of 2)

MODIFY TBL IN DEX
001–016

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 713
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Also referred to as Outdial Rules, this enables the system to add or delete a digit string or single
digit, if needed, to complete a call (e.g. adding a digit “1”). The characters Q and # can also be
entered.
Option

Max No. of Digit Entries

Number of digits to delete
Insert (before dialling string)
Append (after dialling string)

15
14
14

Digit String Key
Insert String + Digit String (delete) + Append String

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 713
Display shows

LCR MODIFY (001)
NOF DEL DGT:00

Enter index number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press UP or DOWN keys to make selection and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

LCR MODIFY (005)
NOF DEL DGT:00

Enter number of digits to delete (e.g. 2)
OR
Press RIGHT soft key to skip step and move cursor to
step 4

LCR MODIFY (005)
NOF DEL DGT:02

Enter digits to be inserted (e.g., 10288)
OR
Press RIGHT soft key to skip step or to store information and
advance to step 5

LCR MODIFY (005)
I:10288

Enter digits to be appended (e.g., 45678)
OR
Press RIGHT soft key to skip step or to store
information and return to step 2

LCR MODIFY (005)
A:45678_

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Depends on software version

Related Items:

MMC 710 LCR Digit Table
MMC 711 LCR Time Table
MMC 712 LCR Route Table

MMC 713 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 714
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

DDI NUMBER AND NAME
TRANSLATION
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides a method of assigning an incoming DDI call through ISDN to a specific station. If you
have specified DDI service with your Network Carrier, you can match each DDI number to specific stations using this command according to the day or night mode. You also have the option,
when the destination station is busy, of deciding if the call is to be camped on to the destination
station or of clearing the call.
There is an extra option to adjust the number of digits to be compared by skipping the programmed counts from the first digit point provided by the Network. If there is no matching number in DDI NUMBER TABLE, the system routes this call to the operator group.
There is a total of 200 entries (DCS/Compact II systems), 50 entries (816 systems), or 20
entries (408i systems). Each entry consists of the following fields:
0

DIGITS (DGT)

Digits to be received (max. 12 digits). Wild card (Q) is a valid entry.

DAY DEST (D)

Destination in day mode. Can be a station, a station group, a trunk
or trunk group. Repeat (B) will be acceptable to bypass.

NIGHT DEST (N)

Destination in day mode. Can be a station, a station group, a trunk
or a trunk group. Repeat (B) will be acceptable to bypass.

CALL WAIT (CW)

Toggles YES or NO.

DELETE

Decides the number of digits not to be translated from the first digit
received. This is useful when the received digits are prefixed with
the same digit(s).

NAME

Gives a name to an individual entry (11 characters maximum).

Names are written using the keypad in the same way as speed dial names (see MMC 706).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

MMC 714 (Page 1 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 714
Display shows

DID DIGIT
DGT:2QQ

(001)

Enter valid entry number (e.g. 005 or 05) via dial keypad
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

DID DIGIT
DGT:

(005)

Enter the DDI number (e.g. 4603831) via dial keypad
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
(Max. digits is 12)

DID DIGIT
DGT:4603831

(005)

Enter day destination via dial keypad (e.g. 204)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

DID DIGIT
→D:204

(005)
N:B

Enter night destination via dial keypad (e.g. 204)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

DID DIGIT
→D:204

(005)
N:204

Enter 1 for YES (call waiting) or 0 for NO (no call waiting)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

DID DIGIT
CW: NO

(005)
DELETE:0

Enter digits to be deleted via dial keypad (e.g. 3)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

DID DIGIT
CW: NO

(005)
DELETE:3

Enter name using above table and press RIGHT soft
key to return to step 2

DID DIGIT
NAME:_

(005)

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

MMC 714 (Page 2 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Default Data:

DIGITS*
DAY DEST
NIGHT DEST
CALL WAIT
DELETE
NAME

001
2QQ
B
B
NO
0
NONE

002
3QQ
B
B
NO
0
NONE

003
5QQ
B
B
NO
0
NONE

*For 816 systems, default DIGITS are:
01
2QQ

02
5QQ

03
7QQQ

(Other defaults apply.)

For 408i systems, default DIGITS are:
01
2Q

02
5Q

(Other defaults apply.)

Related Items:

MMC 419 BRI Option
MMC 420 PRI Option
MMC 421 MSN Digit

MMC 714 (Page 3 of 3)

03
7QQQ

004
7QQQ
B
B
NO
0
NONE

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MMC: 715
3

DCS

PROGRAMMED STATION
MESSAGE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows a custom message, up to 16 characters, to be programmed. There are 20 messages allowed in total (01–20). Messages 01–10 are pre-set (see default data) but can be changed by deleting and/or typing in new text. Messages 11–20 are blank by default (“EMPTY MESSAGE” may
be displayed if one of these is selected, or the display is blank).
Messages are written via the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character. Pressing a different key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the message is “In the Showroom,”
press key number “4” three times to get the letter “I.” Then press key number “6” twice to get the
to move the cursor right. Continue selecting characters from the
keypad to complete your message. Press the programmable ”A” key to toggle between upper
and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, then select the character.

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 715
Display shows

PGM.MESSAGE(01)
IN A MEETING

Enter index number (e.g., 11)
OR
Press UP or DOWN arrow to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

PGM.MESSAGE(11)
EMPTY MESSAGE

MMC 715 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
3.

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

If “EMPTY MESSAGE” is displayed, you can press
HOLD to delete this text. However, this Is optional as
any new message you type will simply overwrite the
displayed text.

PGM.MESSAGE(11)
In the Showroom

Enter new message via the dial keypad using the above
table (maximum 16 characters)
4.

Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

10 programmed messages (these can be changed)
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.

IN A MEETING
OUT ON A CALL
OUT TO LUNCH
LEAVE A MESSAGE
PAGE ME
OUT OF TOWN
IN TOMORROW
RETURN AFTERNOON
ON VACATION
GONE HOME

Messages 11–20 are blank
Related Items:

MMC 115 Set Programmed Message

MMC 715 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 716
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

UK LCR OPTION
3

CII

816

408i

408

Before using this MMC, run MMC 812 to make sure the correct country option (“UK”) has
been selected.
MMC 716 provides UK LCR options.
0

NETWORK CODE

Provides secondary network access code when the call is
routed to the secondary network. 16 entries maximum
(each 10 digits maximum in length).

PIN CODE

Assigns PIN code used when the call is routed to secondary 131 Cable & Wireless network.

CCC OPTION

Selects Call Cost Option and is related only to 131 Cable
& Wireless service.

STATION PIN NO

Assigns individual users to selected PIN codes in the sy stem.

Note: The second entry may be selected as a primary secondary network. By default, this is 132 (Cable &
Wireless Digital Access). If dialled digits are not matched to the entry in the LCR DIGIT TABLE (MMC 710)
and start with 0, the network code in the second entry will be dialled out by the system prior to transmitting
dialled digits.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 716
Display shows

NETWORK CODE
01:

Dial item number (e.g., 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key.

PIN CODE
1:

Enter index number (e.g., 3)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 2

PIN CODE
3:

Enter the desired access via dial keypad and press
RIGHT soft key to enter and return to step 3

PIN CODE
3: QQQQQQ

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

MMC 716 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Default Data:
NETWORK CODE:
PIN CODE:
CCC OPTION:
STATION PIN NO.:
Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

None
None
None
All stations are 1

710 LCR Digit Table
711 LCR Time Table
712 LCR Route Table
713 LCR Modify Digit Table
812 Select Country

MMC 716 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 717
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

PIN CODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to assign the PIN code used when a call is routed to the secondary 131 Cable & Wireless
network.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 717
Display shows

PIN CODE
1:

Enter index number (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

PIN CODE
2:

Enter the desired access code via dial keypad (e.g.,
3040506)
Press RIGHT soft key to enter and return to step 2 and
enter another number

PIN CODE
2:3040506

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 210 Customer On/Off
MMC 313 Assign PIN Code
MMC 716 Network Code

MMC 717 [Compact I] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 718

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MY AREA CODE
Not Used in the UK

MMC 718 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 720
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
3

CII

816

408i

408

For duplicating key assignments from one keyset to another. This can be done on a per-station
basis or on all stations, but not on a group of stations. A limitation is that the original and target
keysets must be of the same type, e.g. both 24B keysets or both 12B keysets. A further condition
is that a Euro keyset can only be copied to another Euro keyset, and a non-Euro type only to another non-Euro type.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 720
Display shows

[201] COPY KEY
FROM:NONE

Enter the station number to copy to (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN keys to make selection and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

[205] COPY KEY
FROM:NONE

Enter station number to copy from (e.g., 203) and cursor
returns to step 2
OR
Press UP or DOWN keys to make selection

[205] COPY KEY
FROM:203

Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

107
721
722
723

Key Extender
Save Station Key Programming
Station Key Programming
System Key Programming

MMC 720 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 721
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SAVE STATION KEY
PROGRAMMING
3

CII

816

408i

408

Prevents the loss of programmable keys on keysets when testing or replacement is required.
First the data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type or the keys
can be reprogrammed to other features. Once testing or replacement is completed, the data can
be restored to the individual station, providing the same keyset type is used.
Options are SAVE and RESTORE.
Note: This program is not to be confused with MMC 315 (Set Relocation). MMC 721 is for saving and restoring the same electronic device type at that port.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 721
Display shows

[201] SAVE KEY
RESTORE

Enter desired station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

[205] SAVE KEY
RESTORE

Press UP or DOWN key to select function (e.g., SAVE)

[205] SAVE KEY
SAVE

Press RIGHT soft key to enter and return to step 2
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

RESTORE

Related Items:

MMC 107 Key Extender
MMC 722 Station Key Programming
MMC 723 System Key Programming

MMC 721 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MMC: 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
DCS

CII

816

408i

408

Used to customise programmable keys on individual keysets and add-on modules (AOMs). All
systems are provided with default functions for some keys to provide basic operation. For example, keys 1 and 2 are set as CALL keys by default because it is recommended that these keys
should always function as CALL keys (but see Note, below). Other keys can be programmed as
described here. You can use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through the selectable functions
when programming keys (see table at the end of this MMC).
Functions can also be entered via the dial keypad. For example, to assign the OHVA function,
key number 6 can be pressed three times. If the BOSS function is required, press 2 twice for the
first letter B, and then use the UP or DOWN key to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS.
Note: 408/408i systems do not support AOMs and default key functions are different from other systems.
For example, keys 1 and 2 are not set as CALL keys by default as these are not required.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION
1.

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 722
Display shows

[201] KEY (MAST)
01:CALL1 →

OR
For 408/408i systems, display shows
(but the programming procedure is the same
as follows)

OR
[21] KEY PROG
01:DT71 →

Enter station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

[205] KEY (MAST)
01:CALL1 →

If you have a 408/408i system, or if selected station has
no AOM pair, go to step 4

[205] KEY (MAST)
01:CALL1 →

Enter 0 for MAST, 1 for AOM1 or 2 for AOM2.
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key
4.

Enter key number (e.g., 18)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key
OR
Press programmable key

MMC 722 (Page 1 of 3)

[205] KEY (MAST)
18:NONE →_

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press dial key pad number to make selection
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to advance cursor to step 6 to enter extender, if required, or to return to step 2

[205] KEY (MAST)
18:NONE →GPIK_

If required, enter extender (e.g., 03)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

[205] KEY (MAST)
18:NONE →GPIK03

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data: All systems (except 408/408i)—programmable keys 1 and 2 are set as CALL keys.
You are advised not to change these. Defaults for 408/408i systems are shown in the 408/408i
Installation Manual. Each programmable key can be reprogrammed with one of the functions
listed below.
Programmable Key Function Assignments
(7means a function is not available)

AAPLAY:
AAREC:
AB:
ABAND
ACCT:
ALARM:
AN/RLS
BARGE:
BLOCK:
BOSS:
CALL:
CAMP:
CANMG:
CBK:
CLIP:
CONF:
CR:
CS:
CSNR:
DICT:
DIR:
DLOCK:
DND:
DP:
DROP:
DS:
DT:
EXTMIC:
FAUTO:
FLASH:
FWRD:

AUTO ATTND MESSAGE PLAY
AUTO ATTND MESSAGE RECORD
ABSENCE
ABANDON DATA
ACCOUNT
ALARM RING ANSWER
ANSWER/RELEASE
BARGE-IN
OHVA BLOCK
BOSS / SECR ETARY
CALL BUTTON
STATION CAMP ON
MESSAGE CANCEL
CALLBACK
CLIP
CONFERENCE
CALL RECORD
UCD CALL WAITING STATUS
CLIP SAVE NUMBER REDIAL
DICTATION
DIRECTORY
DOOR LOCK
DO NOT DISTURB
DIRECT PICK UP
TRANSFER CALL DROP
DIRECT STATION SELECT
DIRECT TRUNK SELECT
EXTERNAL MICROPHONE
FORCED AUTO ANSWER
FLASH
CALL FORWARD

DCS/CII
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

MMC 722 (Page 2 of 3)

816
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

408
7
7
3
7
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
7
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

408i
7
7
3
3
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

GPIK:
HDSET:
HLDPK:
IG:
INQIRE:
ISPY:
LCR:
LISTN:
LNR:
MMPA:
MMPG:
MSG:
MUTE:
NEW:
NIGHT:
NND:
NXT:
OHVA:
OPER:
PAGE:
PAGPK:
PARK:
PAUSE:
PMSG:
REJECT:
RETRY:
REVW:
SETMG:
SG:
SNR:
SP:
SPD:
SPKR:
STORE:
TG:
TIMER:
TRSF:
UA:
VDIAL:
VG:
VMADM:
VMAME:
VM:
VMMSG:
VREC:
VT:

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

GROUP PICK UP
HEADSET MODE ON/OFF
HOLD PICK UP
IN/OUT OF GROUP
CLIP INQUIRE
CLIP SPY
LEAST COST ROUTING
GROUP LISTENING
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
MEET ME PAGE ANSWER
MEET ME PAGE
MESSAGE
MUTE
NEW CALL
NIGHT SERVICE
CLIP NAME/NUMBER/DATE
CLIP NEXT
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
OPERATOR
PAGE
PICKUP PAGE HOLD
CALL PARK/RETRIEVE
PAUSE
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
OHVA REJECT
AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY
REVIEW (CLIP)
SET MESSAGE W/O RING
STATION GROUP
SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
SUPERVISOR OF UCD
SPEED DIAL
SPEAKER
STORE (CLIP)
TRUNK GROUP
TIMER
TRANSFER
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
VOICE DIALLER ACCESS
VOICE MAIL GROUP
VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION
VOICE MAIL ANSWERING MACHINE
EMULATION
VOICE MAIL MEMO
VOICE MAIL MESSAGE
RECORD KEY FOR VOICE DIALLER
VOICE MAIL TRANSFER

Related Items:

DCS/CII
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

816
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7

408
3
3
3
3
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
3
3
7
3
3
7
3
3
3
3
7
7
7

408i
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7

3
3
3
3

7
7
7
3

MMC 107 Key Extender

MMC 722 (Page 3 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MMC: 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
DCS

CII

816

408i

408

This MMC is similar to MMC 722, Station Key Programming. The difference is that MMC 723 programs keys for all stations rather than individual stations.
All systems are provided with default functions for some keys to provide basic operation. For
example, keys 1 and 2 are set as CALL keys by default because it is recommended that these
keys should always function as CALL keys (but see Note, below). Other keys can be
programmed as described here. You can use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through the
selectable functions when programming keys (see table at the end of this MMC).
Functions can also be entered via the dial keypad. For example, to assign the OHVA function,
key number 6 can be pressed three times. If the BOSS function is required, press 2 twice for the
first letter B, and then use the UP or DOWN key to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS.
Note: Default key functions are different for 408/408i systems compared to all other systems. For example,
keys 1 and 2 are not set as CALL keys by default as these are not required.

Programming in MMC 723 is also done on the basis of keyset type (12-button, 24-button, etc).
TYPE OF SET
Dial

DCS/CII/816

408/408i

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

24-BTN
12-BTN
6-BTN
–
48-BTN AOMS
–
28-BTN
18-BTN
8-BTN

24-BTN
24-BTN EURO
12-BTN
6-BTN
28-BTN
18-BTN
8-BTN
24B SIMPLE

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION
1.

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 723
Display shows

TYPE:24 BTN SETS
01:CALL1→

OR
For 408/408i systems, display shows
(but programming procedure is the same as follows)

OR
TYPE:24 BTN SETS
01:DT71 →

MMC 723 (Page 1 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Enter keyset type via dial keypad, using table above ( e.g.,1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT
soft key

TYPE:12 BTN SETS
01:CALL1→

Enter key number (e.g., 12)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT
soft key

TYPE:12 BTN SETS
12:DS
→

Press dial keypad to select function
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT
soft key to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender, if required
OR
Press LEFT soft key to return to step 3

TYPE:12 BTN SETS
12:DS
→GPIK

If required, enter extender (e.g.,03)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press RIGHT
soft key to return to step 2

TYPE:12 BTN SETS
12:DS
→GPIK03

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data: See MMC 722.
Programmable Key Function Assignments
(7 means a function is not available)

AAPLAY:
AAREC:
AB:
ABAND
ACCT:
ALARM:
AN/RLS
BARGE:
BLOCK:
BOSS:
CALL:
CAMP:
CANMG:
CBK:
CLIP:
CONF:
CR:
CS:
CSNR:
DICT:
DIR:
DLOCK:
DND:
DP:

DCS/CII
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

MMC 723 (Page 2 of 3)

816
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

408
7
7
3
7
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
7
7
7
3
3
3
3
3

408i
7
7
3
3
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

DROP:
DS:
DT:
EXTMIC:
FAUTO:
FLASH:
FWRD:
GPIK:
HDSET:
HLDPK:
IG:
INQIRE:
ISPY:
LCR:
LISTN:
LNR:
MMPA:
MMPG:
MSG:
MUTE:
NEW:
NIGHT:
NND:
NXT:
OHVA:
OPER:
PAGE:
PAGPK:
PARK:
PAUSE:
PMSG:
REJECT:
RETRY:
REVW:
SETMG:
SG:
SNR:
SP:
SPD:
SPKR:
STORE:
TG:
TIMER:
TRSF:
UA:
VDIAL:
VG:
VMADM:
VMAME:
VM:
VMMSG:
VREC:
VT:

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TRANSFER CALL DROP
DIRECT STATION SELECT
DIRECT TRUNK SELECT
EXTERNAL MICROPHONE
FORCED AUTO ANSWER
FLASH
CALL FORWARD
GROUP PICK UP
HEADSET MODE ON/OFF
HOLD PICK UP
IN/OUT OF GROUP
CLIP INQUIR E
CLIP SPY
LEAST COST ROUTING
GROUP LISTENING
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
MEET ME PAGE ANSWER
MEET ME PAGE
MESSAGE
MUTE
NEW CALL
NIGHT SERVICE
CLIP NAME/NUMBER/DATE
CLIP NEXT
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
OPERATOR
PAGE
PICKUP PAGE HOLD
CALL PARK/RETRIEVE
PAUSE
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
OHVA REJECT
AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY
REVIEW (CLIP)
SET MESSAGE W/O RING
STATION GROUP
SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
SUPERVISOR OF UCD
SPEED DIAL
SPEAKER
STORE (CLIP)
TRUNK GROUP
TIMER
TRANSFER
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
VOICE DIALLER ACCESS
VOICE MAIL GROUP
VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION
VOICE MAIL ANSWERING MACHINE
EMULATION
VOICE MAIL MEMO
VOICE MAIL MESSAGE
RECORD KEY FOR VOICE DIALLER
VOICE MAIL TRANSFER

Related Items:

DCS/CII
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

816
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7

408
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
3
3
7
3
3
7
3
3
3
3
7
7
7

408i
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7

3
3
3
3

7
7
7
3

MMC 107 Key Extender
MMC 723 (Page 3 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 724
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
3

CII

816

408i

408

The system comes with a range of acceptable numbering plans set as default. This MMC allows
the system installer to customise feature codes and dialling plans. An error message is also provided in case an access/feature code is duplicated.
The following options can be selected. (N/A=not applicable.)
Option

Description
DCS/CII
0

Dial
816
0

408/408i
0

STN DIAL NO.

Determines the station port dialling numbers

TRK DIAL NO.

Determines the trunk port dialling numbers

AA/VD DIAL NO.
(816=AA DIAL
NO.)

Determines the auto attendant/voice dialler
port dialling numbers

N/A

MISC DIAL NO.

Determines the miscellaneous port dialling
numbers (e.g. MOH)

STNG DIAL NO.

Determines the station group dialling numbers

TRKG DIAL NO.

Determines the trunk group dialling numbers

FEAT DIAL NO.

Determines the feature codes

S0 STN DIAL NO.

Determines the S0 station dialling number

DECT STN DIAL
NO.

Determines the DECT station dialling numbers

N/A

* 408i systems only
If changing feature codes using the FEAT DIAL NO option, you can use the UP and DOWN keys
to scroll through selectable features. Features can also be entered via the dial keypad. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 would be pressed three times. If Block Code is required, press 2
twice for BARGE and then use the UP key to select BLOCK. The example shown below describes the use of this option.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

MMC 724 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 724
Display shows (e.g. for Compact II)

STN DIAL NUMBER
BASE01:201 →

Enter option number 0-8 (e.g., 6)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key.

FEAT DIAL NUMBER
ABAND:
64→

Use dial keypad to select feature (e.g. DICT)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to advance cursor

FEAT DIAL NUMBER
DICT
:NONE→_

Enter digits (e.g., 68) via dial keypad

FEAT DIAL NUMBER
DICT :NONE→68

Press LEFT soft key to enter change and continue to
make changes
OR
Press RIGHT soft key to enter and return to step 2
If an error message appears indicating duplication of
access code:
Enter 1 for YES (change) OR 0 for NO (no change)

SAME DIAL EXIST
CHANGE? Y:1,N:0

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Feature Codes

ABAND
ABS
ACCT
ALMCLR
AUTH
BARGE
BLOCK
BOSS
CAMP
CANMG
CBK
CONF
CR
DICT
DIR
DIRPK
DISALM
DLOCK
DND
DNDOVER
FAUTO
FLASH
FWD
GRPK
Related Items:

64
None
47
57
∗
None
None
None
45
42
44
46
None
None
None
65
58
13
40
None
14
49
60
66

HDSET
HLDPK
HOLD
IG
LCR
LISTN
LNR
MMPA
MMPG
MSG
MYGRPK
NEW
NIGHT
OHVA
OPER
PAGE
PAGPK
PARK
PAUSE
PMSG
REJECT
SELFID
SETMG
SLTMMC

None
12
11
53
#
None
19
56
54
43
None
None
None
None
0 (9)
55
10
None
None
48
None
None
41
15

All programs and features

MMC 724 (Page 2 of 2)

SNR
SPEED
UA
VDIAL
VMADM
VMAME
VMMEMO
VMMSG
VREC
WCOS

17
16
67
681
None
None
None
None
682
59

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 725
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SMDR OPTIONS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to select the information to be printed on the SMDR report. The
following options may be selected. All have YES/NO options (YES=print) except where a new
value or directory name is required.
00 PAGE HEADER

Determines whether a page header prints at the top of each
page. This would normally be turned off if SMDR is being sent to
a call accounting machine.

01 LINE PER PAGE

Selects the length of each page to determine when to print the
SMDR header. The number of lines is in the range 01–99.

02 INCOMING CALL

Determines whether incoming calls print on SMDR.

03 OUTGOING CALL

Determines whether outgoing calls print on SMDR.

04 AUTHORISE CODE

Determines whether authorisation codes print on SMDR.

05 SMDR START TIME

Determines whether valid calls will include the minimum call time
in total call duration (set in MMC 501).

06 IN/OUT GROUP

Allows a message, IN GROUP or OUT GROUP, to be printed in
the Digits Dialled column each time a station enters or leaves a
group.

07 DND CALL

Allows a message, DND ON or DND OFF, to be printed in the
Digits Dialled column each time a station enters or leaves DND.

08 WAKE-UP CALL

Determines whether stations receiving an alarm reminder call
print on SMDR.

09 DIRECTORY NAME

Allows the system administrator to enter a 16-character name
which will appear on the SMDR header.

10 CALLER ID DATA

Can be selected to print CLIP data received from the C.O. on
incoming ISDN calls. This option requires the use of a 132column printer or an 80-column printer set for condensed print.
(Not available on 408 systems.)

11 ABANDON CALL

If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls will print on SMDR.
(Not available on 408 systems.)

13 NO. OF DIAL MASK

Number of dialled digits not to be printed (00–18)

14 DID NUM/NAME

Determines whether DDI number and name print on SMDR. (Not
available on 408 systems.)

The DIRECTORY NAME that appears on the SMDR header is written using the keypad. Pressing
a key selects a character and moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” four times to get the letter “S.” Now press the
number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete
the name. Press the programmable ”A” key to toggle between upper and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, and enter the new character.

MMC 725 (Page 1 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
“A”

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Key #19 (24B keyset) or key #7 (12B keyset) or key #1 (6B keyset)
toggles upper and lower case text.

Exa mple 1: Switching options on (yes=print) or off (no=do not print)
ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 725
Display shows

PAGE HEADER
PRINT : YES

Dial the option number (e.g. 00)
OR
Use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through
options and press RIGHT soft key

PAGE HEADER
PRINT : YES

Use the UP and DOWN keys to select YES or NO
and press the RIGHT soft key to save
the data and return to step 2

PAGE HEADER
PRINT : NO

After all desired options have been selected and set,
press TRSF to exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to exit and advance to next MMC

Example 2: Changing no. of lines per page
ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 725
Display shows

PAGE HEADER
PRINT : YES

Dial the option number 01
OR
Use the UP and DOWN keys to select and press
RIGHT soft key

LINE PER PAGE
66 LINE / PAGE

Enter the number of lines per page in the range 01–99
(e.g., 50)
OR
Use the UP and DOWN keys to change the
number of lines and press the RIGHT soft key to save
the data and return to step 2

LINE PER PAGE
50 LINE / PAGE

MMC 725 (Page 2 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
4.

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

After all desired options have been selected and set,
press TRSF to exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to exit and advance to next MMC

Default Data:
Page Header:
Line Per Page:
Incoming Call:
Outgoing Call:
Authorise Code:
SMDR Start Time:
In/Out Group:

Yes
66
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

DND Call:
Wake-Up Call:
Directory Name:
Caller ID Data:
Abandon Call:
No. of Dial Mask:
DID Num/Name:

Related Items: MMC 300 Customer On/Off Per Station

MMC 725 (Page 3 of 3)

Yes
Yes
None
Yes
Yes
00
Yes

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 726
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

VM/AA OPTIONS
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides a flexible means of setting in-band signalling for voice mail or auto attendant parameters. There are eight main options for programming and several sub-options to customise the
application. Simple YES/NO, numeric and alpha characters are required for setting VM/AA.
The following options may be selected for VM/AA operation:
0 EXT FOR DN1

DTMF information for the station that called the VM/AA
port station which is forwarded to VM/AA port.

1 TRK FOR DN1

DTMF information for the trunk that called the VM/AA
port.

2 EXT FOR DN2

DTMF information for the station that originated the call
to a station which is forwarded to a VM/AA port.

3 TRK FOR DN2

DTMF information for the trunk that called a station forwarded to a VM/AA port.

4 SEPARATOR

In cases where DN2 is used, this specific digit is sent
between the DN1 and the DN2 information. Both DN1
and DN2 must be set to YES for SEPARATOR to be sent.

5 DISCONNECT SIGNAL

Thi s signal is sent when the calling station or C.O. line
hangs up.

6 CALL TYPE ID

Under this VM/AA option are several customising applications:

DIRECT CALL

A call originating directly from another station in the sy stem.

ALL FWD CALL

This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA
port from a station with CALL FORWARD ALL set.

BSY FWD CALL

This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA
port from a station with CALL FORWARD BUSY set.

NOA FWD CALL

This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA
port from a station with CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER
set.

RECALL

A call is recalling the VM/AA port after being transferred
and not answered.

DIR TRK CALL

A C.O. call has gone directly to VM/AA (e.g., trunk 717
DIL to VM/AA).

OVERFLOW

A call has OVERFLOWED to the VM/AA port from a station group.

DID CALL

A DDI call has called the VM/AA port.

MESSAGE CALL

A message button or message reply feature code has
been used to call the VM/AA port.

PROGRESS TONE ID

DTMF digits can be sent in place of normal system
tones. Digits can be assigned to the following tones:

MMC 726 (Page 1 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001
TONES
0. DIAL TONE
1. BUSY TONE
2. RINGBACK TONE
3. DND NO MORE
4. HDSET ANSWER
5. SPKER ANSWER

Note: The call progress tones will automatically be set to the default values if the SMDI VMS SET option in
MMC 210 is turned on.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”
”B”
”C”

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used in some fields where a value is entered or deleted.
Used to input alpha character "A"
Used to insert alpha character "B"
Used to insert alpha character "C"

Keys “A”– “F” are keys #19–24 (24B keysets) or keys #7–12 (12B keysets) or keys #1–6 (6B
keysets)
ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 726
Display shows

EXT FOR DN1
YES

Enter the option number from above list (e.g., 4
— for other options, see steps 4–11)

SEPARATOR
NO

OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
Press LEFT soft key to move cursor
3.

Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR

SEPARATOR
YES

Press UP or DOWN key for selection
Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
4.

If option 0 is selected at step 2

EXT FOR DN1
YES

If option 1 is selected at step 2

TRK FOR DN1
YES

If option 2 is selected at step 2

EXT FOR DN2
NO

If option 3 is selected at step 2

TRK FOR DN2
NO

MMC 726 (Page 2 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

If option 4 is selected at step 2
(A valid entry consists of digits 0–9 or alpha
characters A–C)

SEPARATOR
NO

If option 5 is selected at step 2
(A valid entry consists of digits 0–9 or alpha

DISCONECT SIGNAL
C

characters A–C)
10.

If option 6 is selected at step 2
(A valid entry consists of digits 0–9 or alpha

CALL TYPE ID
DIRECT CALL : NO

characters A–C)
See above list under CALL TYPE ID options list
11.

If option 7 is selected at step 2
(A valid entry consists of digits 0–9 or alpha
characters A–C)
See above list under PROGRESS TONE ID

12.

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:
EXT FOR DN1 = Yes
TRK FOR DN1 = Yes
EXT FOR DN2 = No
TRK FOR DN2 = No
SEPARATOR = No
DISCONNECT SIGNAL = C
CALL TYPE ID:
DIRECT CALL
ALL FWD CALL
BSY FWD CALL
NOA FWD CALL
RECALL
DIR TRK CALL
OVERFLOW
DDI CALL
MESSAGE CALL

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

PROGRESS TONE ID = No (for all)
Related Items:

MMC 207 Assign VM/AA Port

MMC 726 (Page 3 of 3)

PROGRESS TONE ID
DIAL TONE
:NO

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 727
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
3

CII

816

408i

408

This is a read-only MMC. Used for system card version and date display only. The first display is the
system ROM version. Press UP or DOWN key to show versions for other cards installed.
Version displays take the format:
YY.MM.DD Version #
Where YY=Year, MM=Month, DD=Day, Version #= version number (e.g. V1.00)

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 727
Display shows date and version

ROM VERSION
’01. 02. 16. V6.25

Press UP or DOWN key to select other
installed cards (e.g. Misc card)

MISC. VER:MISC
’96. 10. 02 V3.0

Press TRSF to exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to advance to next MMC

Note: If a particular card is not installed, the LCD shows either ‘NO {card type} CARD’ or ‘NO INSTALL CARD.’ If
there is no version data, you see ‘NO VERSION DATA’.

Default Data:

Installed card version and date

Related Items:

None

MMC 727 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 728
3

DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CLIP TRANSLATION TABLE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CLIP number received from the central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there is no match between a received number and a name in this table, “no CLIP name” is displayed.
DCS – translation table consists of 250 entries, each comprising an 11-digit telephone number
and a 16-digit name.
Compact II and 816 – translation table consists of 200 entries, each comprising a 16-digit telephone number and a 16-digit name.
408i – translation table consists of 100 entries, each comprising a 14-digit telephone number and
a 16-digit name.
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character and moves the cursor to
the next position. For example, if the name is “SAM SMITH”, press the number “7” four times to
get the letter “S”. Now press the number “2” once to get the letter “A” Continue selecting characters from the keypad to complete your name. Press the programmable “A” key to toggle between
upper and lower case text.
Tip: When the character you want is on the same key as the previous character you typed in, press the UP
key to move the cursor to the right, then select the character.

The # key can be used for the following special characters (in sequence of key presses):
#

space

[

]

(

)

{

}

;

→

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
“A”

MMC 728 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 728
Display shows first entry

CLIP XLAT
DGT:

(001)

Dial entry number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT
soft key

CLIP XLAT
DGT:_

(005)

Enter telephone number and press RIGHT soft key
to advance to name entry
OR
Enter telephone number and press LEFT soft key
to return to step 2

CLIP XLAT
(005)
DGT:3054264100

Enter associated name as described above and
press RIGHT or LEFT soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press SPEAKER to save and advance to next MMC
OR
Press TRSF to save and exit programming

CLIP XLAT
(005)
SAMSUNG TELECOMS

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

None

MMC 728 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 730
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

AA RECORD GAIN
7

CII

816

408i

408

Used to control AA record gain. Note that AA card port numbers differ between systems (see Part
2, section 2.3, System Configuration: Quick Reference).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 730
Display shows (e.g. for Compact II / 816)

[381] AAREC.GAIN
REC.GAIN:+0.0

Dial AA number (first port in card, e.g 385)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT soft key

[385] AAREC.GAIN
REC.GAIN:+0.0

Press UP or DOWN to select record gain and press
RIGHT soft key

[385] AAREC.GAIN
REC.GAIN:+1.0

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC.

Default Data:

+0.0 dB

Related Items:

None

MMC 730 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 731
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

AA RAM CLEAR
7

CII

816

408i

408

Used for clearing AA RAM on a per-AA card basis. The system only accepts the first port as a
port field and the LCD shows its selection. This will erase the whole message that has been programmed previously on the selected card.
Note that AA card port numbers differ between systems (see Part 2, section 2.3, System
Configuration: Quick Reference).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 731
Display shows (e.g. for Compact II / 816)

[381] RAM CLEAR
CLR RECORDED?NO

Dial AA number (e.g. 381)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

[381] RAM CLEAR
CLR RECORDED?NO

Dial 0 (No) or 1 (Yes)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

[381] RAM CLEAR
CLR RECORDED?YES

Dial 0 (No) or 1 (Yes) to confirm selection
OR
Press UP or DOWN to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

[381] RAM CLEAR
ARE YOU SURE?YES

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

None

MMC 731 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 732
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

AA TRANSLATION TABLE
7

CII

816

408i

408

This command gives more flexibility to the system by compiling a digit to Plan or Destination
Translation Table, which performs the translation from dialled digit(s) into destination parts. Destination parts can be a station number, station group, REPEAT, Change Greeting Message Code
or AA Plan Table.
If you select REPEAT by pressing the “B” key in the destination field, dialled digits may be bypassed without translating.
Number of Table Entries
AA Trans Tables 01 and 02 can have up to 100 entries each (but only 50 each on 816 systems).
Tables 03-–12 have up to 25 entries.
•

If you press the “A” key in the destination field, you can enter AA TRANS NO.

•

If you press the “B” key you can enter REPEAT.

•

If you press the “C” key you can enter CHANGE GREETING MESSAGE CODE.

•

If you press the “D” key, this takes the call to voice mail.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 732
Display shows (note: number of entries for table 01
may show as “001” or “01”, etc. depending on system)

AA TRANS TB (01)
001:0
→ 500

Dial TABLE number (01–12, e.g. 02)
OR
Press UP or DOWN
Press RIGHT soft key

AA TRANS TB (02)
001:
→NONE

Dial ENTRY number 001–100 (or 01–50)
(see Number of Table Entries, above), e.g 002
OR
Press UP or DOWN
Press RIGHT soft key

AA TRANS TB (02)
002:
→NONE

Enter Dial DIGIT (e.g. 2∗∗)
Press RIGHT soft key

AA TRANS TB (02)
002:2∗∗ _ →

MMC 732 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Dial Destination (e.g. 201)
OR
Press UP or DOWN
Press RIGHT soft key

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

AA TRANS TB (02)
002:2∗∗ → 201

Default Data:

Table 01
001 (or 01): 0
→ 500
002 (or 02): 2∗
∗∗ → B
003 (or 03): 3∗
∗∗ → B
004 (or 04): 5∗
∗∗ → B
005 (or 05): 7∗
∗∗∗ → B
006 (or 06): 9
→ P03

Related Items:

MMC 733 AA Plan Table

MMC 732 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 733
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

AA PLAN TABLE
7

CII

816

408i

408

Used to call up the customer-recorded and pre-recorded messages into plans compiled in MMC
732, AA Translation Table. Pre-recorded messages listed below can be applied and destinations
can be programmed as required. Specific ports are programmed in MMC 735, AA Use Table.
There are a total of 64 messages on an AA card:
- 48 messages are to be recorded by the user (01-48),
- 16 messages are pre-recorded in ROM on the card (49-64).
Options are as follows:
Dial
00
01
02
03
04

Option
DAY MSG
NIGHT MSG
ALTER MSG
INVLID MSG
NO ANS MSG

Value
01-64
01-64
01-64
01-64
01-64

05
06
07
08
09
10
11

XFER MSG
BUSY MSG
NO STN MSG
NO ACT MSG
CAMP ON
ANS DELAY
RETRY CNT

01-64
01-64
01-64
01-64
On/Off
01-10
0-5

12
13
14
15
16

TRANS TABLE
BUSY DEST
NO ANS DEST
NO ACT DEST
INVALID DEST

01-12
Dest.
Dest.
Dest.
Dest.

Description
Introduction message during Day Mode
Introduction message during Night Mode
Emergency message
Message when an invalid digit is dialled
Message when there is no reply from the
destination
Transfer notifying message
Message on busy reply
Message on retrial
Message on no action
Allow camp-on to busy extension
Answer Delay
No of times the AA will try to connect before routing
to final destination.
Assigning associated TRANS TABLE
Alternative destination on busy
Alternative destination on no answer
Default destination on no action
Default destination on invalid action

There is a total of 12 tables (01-12) in the system, but not all tables have to be used.
DESTINATION : STATION, STATION GROUP, AA PLAN NO, REPEAT.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

MMC 733 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 733
Display shows

AA PLAN PROG(01)
DAY MSG
:49

Dial AA PLAN TABLE number (01 – 12, e.g 02)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT
soft key

AA PLAN PROG(02)
DAY MSG
:49

Dial attribute number from above table (e.g. 01)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT
soft key

AA PLAN PROG(02)
NIGHT MSG :49

Dial value (e.g 01)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT
soft key

AA PLAN PROG(02)
NIGHT MSG
:01

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

DAY MSG
NIGHT MSG
ALTER MSG
INVLID MSG
NO ANS MSG
XFER MSG
BUSY MSG
NO STN MSG
NO ACT MSG
CAMP ON
ANS DELAY TIME
RETRY CNT
TRANS TABLE
BUSY DEST
NO ANSWER DEST
NO ACT DEST
INVALID DEST

: 49
: 49
: NONE
: 64
: 51
: 53
: 52
: 50
: 59
: OFF
: 01 SEC
:3
: 01
: 500
: 500
: 500
: 500

Related Items:

MMC 732 AA Translation Table
MMC 734 AA Message Match

MMC 733 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 734
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

AA MESSAGE MATCH
7

CII

816

408i

408

Allows up to five messages to be grouped together into a single transmission with its own identification number.
For example, 05+07+13+16+64 = 01 (identification number).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 734
If an AA card is fitted the following display will appear

AA MSG MATCH(01)
01

Dial the desired MSG identification (link) number
01-64 (e.g. 05)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT
soft key

AA MSG MATCH(01)
05+

Dial MSG numbers (01 - 64 ) recorded in AA card
(up to 5)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT
soft key

AA MSG MATCH(01)
05+07+13+16+64

(MMC will automatically insert ‘+’ as a delimiter)
4.

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

MSG index number

Related Items:

None

MMC 734 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 735
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

AA USE TABLE
7

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns an AA PLAN TABLE to either an individual AA port or an AA group.
AA Plan Numbers are in the range 01 to 12.
Note that AA card port numbers differ between systems (see Part 2, section 2.3, System Configuration: Quick Reference).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 735
Display shows (e.g. for Compact II)

[381]AA PLAN
PLAN NO : 01

Dial AA number or AA group pilot number (e.g. 382)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT
soft key

[382]AA PLAN
PLAN NO : 01

Dial AA PLAN number (e.g. 02)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RIGHT
soft key

[382]AA PLAN
PLAN NO : 02

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC.

Default Data:

Plan 01

Related Items:

None

MMC 735 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 736
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN AA MOH
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows an AA MSG to be used as a Music-On-Hold (MOH) source.
Note that AA card port numbers differ between systems (see Part 2, section 2.3, System
Configuration: Quick Reference).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEY
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 736
Display shows (e.g. DCS)

[3958]SET AAMOH
MOH MSG: NOT USE

Press RIGHT soft key to select MOH message

[3958]SET AAMOH
MOH MSG: NOT USE

Dial AA message number for MOH (01 – 64, e.g. 20)

[3958]SET AAMOH
MOH MSG: 20

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NOT USE

Related Items:

None

MMC 736 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 737
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

DECT SYSTEM CODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to identify your DECT system and the handsets you register with your system.
The DECT System Code for your system is made up of two fields: the System ID which is three
hexadecimal digits in the range 001 to 999; and the Auth Code (short for Authentication Code)
which is four hexadecimal digits in the range 0000 to 9999. The default values are 000 and FFFF
respectively.
Important:
You must use this MMC to change the default values for the values you have been provided
with by your supplier. If you do not change the defaults you will not be able to register
handsets.
Once you have entered your new System ID and Auth Code using this MMC you can then begin
registering your handsets with the Auth Code. The system checks the Auth Code entered for
each handset against the DECT Auth Code. If it is the same, the registration procedure continues; otherwise, the DCS rejects the registration procedure.
Caution: Only the system administrator and/or installer should be allowed access to
change the DECT System Code and register handsets.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 737
Display shows

DECT SYSTEM CODE
AUTH CODE : FFFF

Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and enter AUTH
CODE via dial keypad (eg 1234)

DECT SYSTEM CODE
AUTH CODE : 1234

Press RIGHT soft key and press VOL UP or DOWN to
select SYSTEM ID

DECT SYSTEM CODE
SYSTEM ID : 000

Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor and enter SYSTEM ID via dial keypad (eg 567)

DECT SYSTEM CODE
SYSTEM ID : 567

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

Auth Code
System ID

FFFF
000

(These values must be changed by the installer)

MMC 737 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

738
739
741
742
743
744
745

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001
DECT Clear Registration
BSI Download
BSI Card Restart
BSI Status
DBS Status
BSI Registration On/Off
BSI Carrier

MMC 737 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 738
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to delete previously registered information for DECT handsets. This MMC has two modes:
q
q

FORCED: When this mode is programmed, the system clears the registered information by
force.
NORMAL: Whenever the system wants to clear the registration of a DECT handset, the deletion must be confirmed from the handset. If the confirmation is successful, the system clears
the registered information. (If the confirmation fails, the system cannot clear the information.)

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 738
Display shows

[7901]DECT CLEAR
MODE: FORCED

Enter the number of DECT handset to clear via dial
keypad and press the RIGHT soft key to move the
cursor

[7901]DECT CLEAR
MODE: FORCED

Select the de-registration (clear) mode via UP or
DOWN key (e.g. Normal) and press the RIGHT soft
key to move the cursor

[7901]DECT CLEAR
MODE: NORMAL

Enter 1 for Yes or 0 for No for DECT CLEAR
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select

[7901]DECT CLEAR
DECT CLEAR:YES

Press TRSF button to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER button to store and advance to next
MMC

Default Data:

Forced mode

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

737 DECT System Code
739 BSI Download
741 BSI Card Restart
742 BSI Status
743 DBS Status
744 BSI Registration On/Off
745 BSI Carrier

MMC 738 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 739
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

BSI DOWNLOAD
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to download a new version of the DBS software when you upgrade to a new version of BSI
ROM.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 739
Display shows

BSI SLOT:2 DBS:1
DOWNLOAD? :NO

Select the slot number (see above) via UP or DOWN
key, e.g. 3

BSI SLOT:3 DBS:1
DOWNLOAD? :NO

Select the DBS number (see above) via UP or DOWN
key, e.g. 1

BSI SLOT:3 DBS:1
DOWNLOAD? :NO

Press UP or DOWN key to select download and
confirm download

BSI SLOT:3 DBS:1
DOWNLOAD? :YES
BSI SLOT:3 DBS:1
ARE YOU SURE?YES

When downloading is in progress, the display shows
However, if a downloading failure occurs, the display
shows
5.

BSI SLOT:3 DBS:1
DOWNLOADING
BSI SLOT:3 DBS:1
DOWNLOAD FAIL

Press TRSF button to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER button to store and advance to next
MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC
MMC

737 DECT System Code
738 DECT Clear Registration
741 BSI Card Restart
742 BSI Status
743 DBS Status
744 BSI Registration On/Off

MMC 739 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 740
DCS

✓

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

STATION PAIR
CI

✓

CII

✓

816

✓

408i

✗

408

✗

Allows a station (such as a DECT handset) to be assigned as a ‘secondary’ to a ‘primary’ keyphone station in the system. This will allow all features to be set or cancelled from either station,
and both will ring when the ‘primary’ receives a call.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 740
Display shows

[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:NONE

Enter the primary station number via dial keypad
(e.g. 201)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RGHT soft key

[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:NONE

Enter the secondary station number via dial keypad
(e.g. 205)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select and press RGHT soft key

[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:205

Press TRSF button to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER button to store and advance to next
MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

None

MMC 740 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 741
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

BSI CARD RESTART
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to restart a BSI card or DBS. The DBS/BSI card will be restarted automatically.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 741
Display shows

BSI SLOT : 2 DBS : 1
RESTART ?
NO

Select the specific BSI slot number or press the RIGHT
soft key and select the specific DBS (using the keypad
or the UP/DOWN keys)

BSI SLOT : 2 DBS : 1
RESTART ?
NO

(If you want to restart all DBSs, you must select "A"
instead of a DBS number by pressing the ANS/RLS
key)
Press the RIGHT soft key
3.

Press UP or DOWN to select Yes or No and press
RIGHT soft key

BSI SLOT : 2 DBS : 1
RESTART ?
YES

Confirm whether you want to restart by selecting YES
or NO using the UP or DOWN key, and press RIGHT
soft key

BSI SLOT : 2 DBS : 1
ARE YOU SURE ? YES

Press TRSF button to exit
OR
Press SPEAKER button to advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 737 DECT System Code
MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration
MMC 739 BSI Download
MMC 742 BSI Status
MMC 743 DBS Status
MMC 744 BSI Registration On/Off
MMC 745 BSI Carrier

MMC 741 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 742
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

BSI STATUS
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Shows the status of the BSI card.

ACTION
1.

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 742
Display shows:
For Compact II - “SUCC” (successful) if status of BSI
card is good, or "FAIL"

OR
For DCS - "M" = Master, "S" = Slave (not used)
“SUCC” (successful) if status of BSI card is good, or
"FAIL"
2.

BSI STATUS
SUCC

BSI STATUS
M:SUCC S:NONE

Press TRSF button to exit
OR
Press SPEAKER button to advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 737 DECT System Code
MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration
MMC 739 BSI Download
MMC 741 BSI Card Restart
MMC 743 DBS Status
MMC 744 BSI Registration On/Off
MMC 745 BSI Carrier

MMC 742 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 743
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

DBS STATUS
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Used for checking the status of DECT base stations (DBS).
ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 743

The status of each DBS is displayed:
If status is good, "1" is displayed
If status is not good, "0" is displayed

For DCS - (DBS 1-8)

DBS : 12345678
STS : 11101100

For Compact II - (DBS 1-3)

DBS STATUS
1:1 2:1 3:0

Press TRSF button to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER button to store and advance to next
MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

MMC 737 DECT System Code
MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration
MMC 739 BSI Download
MMC 741 BSI Card Restart
MMC 742 BSI Status
MMC 744 BSI Registration On/Off

MMC 743 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

MMC: 744 DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
DCS

CII

816

408i

408

Allows DECT handset registration to be enabled on a keyphone system. If this MMC is not
opened and an attempt is made to register a DECT handset, an error message will be displayed.
The default passcode for registration can be changed using MMC 202, Change Feature Passcodes.
Caution: When you have finished registering handsets, run this MMC again to set the registration mode to DISABLE. This will prevent unauthorised access to this feature.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 744
Display shows

ENABLE DECT REG.
PASSCODE:

Enter passcode

ENABLE DECT REG.
PASSCODE:[[[[

If the correct code is entered the display shows
An incorrect code entry shows

ENABLE DECT REG.
DISABLE
ENABLE DECT REG.
PASSCODE ERROR

If the SYSTEM ID in MMC 737 (DECT System Code) has
not been set, this message will be displayed:

ENABLE DECT REG.
NO REG. SYSTEM ID

Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select and press RIGHT
soft key

ENABLE DECT REG.
ENABLE

Press TRSF key to exit
OR
Press SPEAKER button to store and advance to next
MMC

Default Data:

DISABLE

Related Items:

MMC 202 Change Feature Passcodes
MMC 737 DECT System Code
MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration
MMC 739 BSI Download
MMC 741 BSI Card Restart
MMC 742 BSI Status
MMC 743 DBS Status
MMC 745 BSI Carrier
MMC 744 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 745
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

BSI CARRIER
CI

CII

816

408i

408

A base station uses one of 10 channels (FDMA technology). This MMC is used to allow or deny
the use of each channel (carrier). By default, all carriers can be used by a base station.
Options:

Carrier can be used

Carrier cannot be used

PROGRAM KEYS
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION
1.

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 745
The display shows the status of each carrier (0 – 9):
If ‘1’ is shown below a carrier, this carrier can be
used by the base station

CARS:0123456789
SELS: 1111111111

If ‘0’ is shown below a carrier, this carrier cannot
be used by the base station
2.

Dial 1 or 0 for each carrier as required

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

1111111111

Related Items:

MMC 202 Change Feature Passcodes
MMC 737 DECT System Code
MMC 738 DECT Clear Registration
MMC 739 BSI Download
MMC 741 BSI Card Restart
MMC 742 BSI Status
MMC 743 DBS Status
MMC 744 BSI Registration On/Off

CARS:0123456789
SELS: 1101111111

MMC 745 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 750

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

VM CARD RESTART
(Cadence & SVMi-4)

DCS

CII

816

408i

408

Determines whether mailboxes are set up according to the data set in MMC 751, Assign Mailbox,
when the Cadence/SVMi-4 card is restarted. There are two options available in this MMC:
DOWNLOAD
When the card starts, part of the power-up procedure will download data from the system to determine time, date, what mailboxes to create, and the system numbering plan. This must be done
at least once, but when done this download fea-ture can be turned off to save boot-up time.
CARD RESTART
If this option is set to YES, the card will immediately restart according to the Download option
specified above.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll thro ugh options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 750
Display shows

VM CARD RESTART
DOWNLOAD ?YES

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO (download)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select
Press RIGHT soft key

VM CARD RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO (restart)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select
Press RIGHT soft key

VM CARD RESTART
CARD RESTART?YES

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

DOWNLOAD=YES
CARD RESTART=NO

Related Items:

MMC 751 Assign Mailbox
Cadence programming
SVMi-4 programming

MMC 750 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 751
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN MAILBOX
(Cadence & SVMi-4)
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns mailboxes to each station or station group. Mailboxes are assigned to all stations or
groups flagged as YES in this MMC if DOWNLOAD=YES is set in MMC 750 during VM card startup. Groups supported are 500–529 for DCS and 500–519 for Compact II.
New boxes can be added through Voice Mail administration or by using this MMC.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 751
Display shows

ASSIGN MAIL BOX
301 :YES

Dial station or group number (e.g. 302)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station
Press RIGHT soft key

ASSIGN MAIL BOX
302 :YES

Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select
Press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

ASSIGN MAIL BOX
302 :YES

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All stations=YES
All groups=NO

Related Items:

Cadence programming
SVMi-4 programming

MMC 751 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 752
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

AUTO RECORD
(Cadence & SVMi-4)
7

CII

816

408i

408

Specific stations can be assigned to automatically record conversations. Options for recording
are:
Station number (STN)
Mailbox (MB)
Voice Mail port
Call type: all incoming calls (I), all outgoing calls (O), or both incoming and outgoing calls (B).
A maximum of eight stations can be assigned at any one time.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 752
Display shows

AUTO RECORD
STN: 301
MB: NONE

Dial station number (e.g. 302)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select station
Press RIGHT soft key

AUTO RECORD
STN: 302
MB: NONE

Dial mailbox number (e.g. 341)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select mailbox
Press RIGHT soft key

AUTO RECORD
STN: 302
MB: 341

Dial Voice Mail port number (e.g. 519)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select port
Press RIGHT soft key

AUTO RECORD
PORT: 519 CALL:I

Press UP or DOWN key to select call type
I, O or B (e.g. B) and press RIGHT soft key

AUTO RECORD
PORT: 519 CALL:B

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

MB=NONE

PORT=NONE

Related Items:

Cadence programming
SVMi-4 programming

CALL=I

MMC 752 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 753
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

WARNING DESTINATION
(Cadence & SVMi-4)
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Provides an emergency destination for calls to Cadence or SVMi-4 if the card is removed or offline. The destination can be a station number or a group number. Any station call that is forwarded to Voice Mail will remain ringing at the forwarding station until answered.
Note: The destination is the same as the VM ALARM mailbox in MMC 755.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 753
Display shows default destination

WARNING DEST.
DEST:500

Dial destination number (e.g., 213)
OR

WARNING DEST.
DEST:213

Press UP or DOWN to scroll to number
3.

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

WARNING DESTINATION = 500

Related Items:

MMC 500 System-Wide Counters (Alarm Reminder Counter option)
Cadence programming
SVMi-4 programming

MMC 753 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 754
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

VM HALT
(Cadence & SVMi-4)
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Used to take the Cadence or SVMi-4 card off-line. This MMC ensures that there are no calls on
the card when it is taken off-line. You cannot halt the card using MMC 810 (Halt Processing).
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 754
Display shows

VM HALT
STATUS: PROC

Dial 1 to halt (HALT) or 0 not to halt (PROC)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select

VM HALT
STATUS: HALT

Press RIGHT soft key
3.

Press UP or DOWN key to select YES or NO
(YES will take the card off-line)
Press RIGHT soft key

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

Cadence programming
SVMi-4 programming

VM HALT
ARE YOU SURE?YES

MMC 754 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 755
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

VM ALARM
(Cadence & SVMi-4)
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Generates an alarm message in a mailbox, defined in MMC 753, when the Cadence card hard
disk drive or SVMi-4 card flash memory reaches a selected ‘threshold’ (percentage of capacity).
You select the threshold in this MMC—the range is 00–99%.
For example, if you select a threshold of 70, an alarm message is generated if more than 70% of
capacity is reached.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 755
Display shows

VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:80

Enter new threshold value using keypad (e.g. 85)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select threshold value
Press RIGHT soft key

VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:85

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

THRESHOLD: 80%

Related Items:

Cadence programming
SVMi-4 programming

MMC 755 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 756
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN VM MOH
(Cadence & SVMi-4)
7

CII

816

408i

408

Assigns a Cadence or SVMi-4 port as a Music On Hold (MOH) source. Once assigned, the port
cannot be used for AA/VM applications.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 756
Display shows

SET VMMOH
717
: NOT USE

Press UP or DOWN key to select port and
press RIGHT soft key

SET VMMOH
717
: NOT USE

Press UP or DOWN key to select MOH file
number (00–99*) and press RIGHT soft key

SET VMMOH
717
: 01

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

* Note: nos. 00–99 are equivalent to Cadence or SVMi-4 file nos. 5000–5099 (see Cadence or SVMi-4
documentation)

Default Data:

NOT USE

Related Items:

Cadence programming
SVMi-4 programming

MMC 756 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 757
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

VM IN/OUT
(Cadence & SVMi-4)
7

CII

816

408i

408

Defines which VM port is used for incoming calls, outgoing calls, or both. Options are:
IN
OUT
IN/OUT
Can also be used to reset the current MOH port (set in MMC 756) to one of the above.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 757
Display shows

VM IN/OUT
717 : IN/OUT

Dial port number (e.g. 718)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to select
Press RIGHT soft key

VM IN/OUT
718 : IN/OUT

Press UP or DOWN key to select option
(e.g. IN) and press RIGHT soft key

VM IN/OUT
718 : IN

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

IN/OUT

Related Items:

Cadence programming
SVMi-4 programming

MMC 757 [DCS / Compact II] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 800
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ENABLE TECHNICIAN
PROGRAM
CI

CII

816

408i

408

Used to open and close system-level (technician) programming. If programming is not opened
and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message “ACCESS DENIED” will be
displayed.
A four-digit passcode is required to access this MMC (which can be changed in MMC 801).
When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs.
The procedure below describes how to open programming.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Press TRSF 800
Display shows

ENABLE TECH.PROG
PASSCODE:

Enter passcode

ENABLE TECH.PROG
PASSCODE: ∗∗∗∗

DCS only – Correct code shows

Compact II, 816 and 408/408i – Correct code
shows

ENABLE TECH.PROG
DISABLE TENANT:1
OR
ENABLE TECH.PROG
DISABLE

Incorrect code shows (you return to the passcode
entry display so you can try again)

ENABLE TECH. PROG
PASSCODE ERROR

Enter 1 to enable or enter 0 to disable
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select

ENABLE TECH.PROG
ENABLE TENANT:1
OR
ENABLE TECH.PROG
ENABLE

DCS only - Press RIGHT soft key to move to tenant
number and enter tenant number (1–2)

MMC 800 (Page 1 of 2)

ENABLE TECH.PROG
ENABLE TENANT: 2

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press SPEAKER to advance to MMC entry level

Enter the MMC required and begin programming.
Follow the instructions for that MMC.

801:TEC.PASSCODE
SELECT PROG.ID

Disabling (Closing) Programming Mode

If you wish to immediately close programming mode when you have finished programming:
§
§

Return to MMC 800. The display shows that programming is enabled.
Use the UP or DOWN key to select DISABLE and press TRSF to exit.

If you do not close programming using MMC 800, programming mode will be automatically disabled
if you do not carry out any programming tasks within the time set in the system timer KMMC LOCK
OUT (see MMC 501, System-Wide Timers).
Default Data:

DISABLE (closed)
Passcode=4321

Related Items:

None

MMC 800 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 801
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CHANGE TECHNICIAN
PASSCODE
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800 (Enable Technician Program)
from its current value.
Note: The passcode is four digits long. The current or “old” passcode is required for this MMC.

PROGRAM KEYS
KEYPAD
SPEAKER

Used to enter passcodes
Save data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 801

TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_

Enter new passcode

TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗

Enter new passcode again to verify

TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :∗∗∗∗

If verification is correct, press RIGHT soft key to continue and enter desired MMC

TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :SUCCESS

If verification is incorrect display shows “Failure”
and system returns to step 2

TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :FAILURE

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to advance to MMC

Default Data:

Default passcode = 4321

Related Items:

MMC 800 Enable Technician Program

MMC 801 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 802
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CUSTOMER ACCESS
MMC NUMBER
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the installer to designate which MMCs the system administrator (customer) has access to.
For example, it is advised that the customer has access to MMC 102, Call Forward, for call forwarding but it is not advised that the customer has access to MMC 710, LCR Digit Table, for LCR
dial plans. (MMC 802 is for both tenants on DCS systems.)
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION
1.

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 802
Display shows

CUSTOMER ACCESS
100:STN LOCK:YES

DCS only Enter desired tenant number (1–2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

CUSTOMER ACCESS
100:STN LOCK:YES

Enter desired MMC number (e.g. 102)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

CUSTOMER ACCESS
102:CALL FWD:YES

Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
LEFT soft key to return to step 3 to make additional entries

CUSTOMER ACCESS
102:CALL FWD:NO

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:
Customers have access to the following MMCs (default = YES):
100–119, 201, 202, 209, 211–14, 216, 300–306, 308, 309, 312, 315, 317, 404–406, 408–410, 412,
414–416, 421, 500, 502, 505, 507, 508, 600–602, 604, 606, 607, 705– 708, 714, 715, 720– 722, 725,
727, 728.
Related Items:

None

MMC 802 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 803
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
7

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the assignment of DCS tenant groups on a per-cabinet, slot and port basis. The simple
rule is Cabinet-Slot-Port=Tenant. The simplicity of this program allows for flexible assignments.
The only information needed is the correct correlation of entries.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 803
Display shows

TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 P:01 T:1

Enter cabinet (C) number (if no change, press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor)

TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 P:01 T:1

Enter slot (S) number (if no change, press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor)

TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 P:01 T:1

Enter port (P) number (if no change, press RIGHT
soft key to move cursor)

TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 P:01 T:1

Enter tenant (T) number (if no change, press RIGHT
soft key to return to step 2)

TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 P:01 T:1

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

All assignments tenant 1

Related Items:

Tenant group

MMC 803 [DCS] (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 804
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides a means of setting parameters for the system I/O ports to work with one of the following:
• a personal computer (PC)
• Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
• UCD statistics report/periodic UCD information (except 408/408i)
• CTI (TSAPI) interface (DCS and Compact II only).
All systems have two I/O ports (Ports 1 and 2), except 408/408i which have one I/O port (Port 1).
Programming can be accomplished easily, using the tables below to customise any I/O port.
PARAMETER OPTIONS
Dial 0
Service
Dial 1
Baud Rate
Dial 2
Char Length
Dial 3
Parity
Dial 4
Retry Count
Dial 5
Stop Bit
Dial 6
Wait Time
Dial 7
DSR Check
or
SIM Pair

Type of Service
Speed
Character Length
Parity Bit
Number of Retries
Stop Bit
Message Wait Time
DSR Check on/off (Compact II, 816 and 408/408i only)
No. of the station connected to the Serial Interface Module
(SIM) (DCS only)

SERVICE TYPE
Each port can be set to one of the following service types. Note that the services available depend on
the type of system being programmed. For example, DCS and CII systems provide all the following
services while 408/408i systems provide PC-MMC and SMDR only.
Type
PC-MMC
SMDR
UCD REPT
UCD/SMDR
CTI
CTI/SMDR
CTI/UCD
CTI/S/U
VM TRACE
NOT USE

Description
PC application
SMDR report (call logging)
UCD report on request by the
supervisor, or daily
Both SMDR and UCD report will
be generated
Dedicated Switch Link Interface
CTI and SMDR
CTI and UCD
CTI, SMDR and UCD
Voice Mail monitoring
Not used

MMC 804 (Page 1 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SPEED (BPS)

600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200

Dial
DCS/CII/816
408/408i
0
N/A
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
N/A

CHARACTER LENGTH
Dial 7
Dial 8

7 bits
8 bits

PARITY
Dial 0
Dial 1
Dial 2

None
Odd
Even

STOP BIT
Dial 1
Dial 2

1 bit
2 bit

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear entry (when valid)

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 804
Display shows

SYS I/O PORT (1)
SERVICE:PC-MMC

Enter desired port via dial keypad (e.g. 2) (note:
408/408i sy stems have port 1 only)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

SYS I/O PORT (2)
SERVICE:SMDR

Enter parameter option from the above option list via
dial keypad (e.g. 1)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

SYS I/O PORT (2)
BAUD:9600 BPS

MMC 804 (Page 2 of 3)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Enter desired value via dial keypad (e.g. 19200 baud)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to display value and press
RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

SYS I/O PORT (2)
BAUD:19200 BPS

Default Data:
Option

DCS/CII/816
Port 1

Service Type
Baud Rate (bps)
Char Length (bits)
Parity
Retry Count
Stop Bit
Wait Time (msec)
DSR Check
SIM Pair
Related Items:

PCMMC
9600
8
None
03
1
300
Off
None

Port 2
SMDR
9600
8
None
03
1
300
Off
None

PC-MMC programming
SMDR options

MMC 804 (Page 3 of 3)

408/408i
Port 1
SMDR
9600
8
None
03
1
300
Off
N/A

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 805
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

TX LEVEL AND GAIN
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the system administrator to set the base level of TX volume and the TSW gain control for
nine time-switch connect types.
There are eight (8) volume levels which are controlled by the UP and DOWN keys on the keyset.
However, there are 11 possible levels in a DCS or Compact II system, nine in an 816 system, and
four in a 408/408i system. With this MMC, you can select the desired levels.
Caution
You should only change TSW gain control values under the supervision of Technical Support.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 805
Display shows

TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 0 → 1

Press UP or DOWN key to select TX LEVEL CONTROL or TSW GAIN CONTROL
OR
Press RIGHT soft key to select

TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 0 → 1

If you selected TX, goto step 3
If you selected TSW, goto step 4
3.

Press RIGHT soft key to go to the volume level
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to go to next volume level

TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1 → 2

Enter desired volume level via dial keypad
OR
Use UP or DOWN key to scroll data (00-10)
(Go to step 6 if finished)

TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1 → 3

Press RIGHT soft key to go to the TSW GAIN CONTROL type
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to go to next TSW type

TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLT → SLT:+0. 0

MMC 805 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

Press UP or DOWN key to select TSW gain data
Press RIGHT soft key to go back to step 4 or go to
step 6 if finished

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLT → SLT:+2. 0

Default Data:
TX Level: 0 → 1, 1 → 2, 2 → 3, 3 → 4, 4 → 5, 5 → 6, 6 → 7, 7 → 8
TSW Gain: (Only some of the following may apply to your system)
SLTÔ
Ô SLT
SLTÔ
Ô ATRK
SLTÔ
Ô DTRK
ATRKÔ
Ô SLT
ATRKÔ
Ô ATRK
ATRKÔ
Ô DTRK
DTRKÔ
Ô SLT
DTRKÔ
Ô ATRK
DTRKÔ
Ô DTRK
DECTÔ
Ô SLT
DECTÔ
Ô ATRK
DECTÔ
Ô DTRK
SLTÔ
Ô DECT
ATRKÔ
Ô DECT
DTRKÔ
Ô DECT
DECTÔ
Ô DECT

Related Items:

None

MMC 805 (Page 2 of 2)

+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+1.9
– 6.0
+1.9
+1.9
+0.0
+0.0
+0.0
+1.9
– 6.0
– 6.0
– 6.0
– 6.0

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 806
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

CARD PRE-INSTALL
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the pre-programming of a slot for a specific card. For example, after the system is installed and a new card is added, running this program causes the system to accept the card for
what it is and not for what it is not.
The procedure differs slightly for each type of system, as described below.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
n

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

DCS PROCEDURE

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 806
Display shows

C1–01 :INSTALL
PRITRK →PRITRK

Enter cabinet number (e.g., 3)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor

C3–01 :INSTALL
PRITRK →PRITRK

Enter slot number (e.g., 5)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to return to step 2

C3–05 :INSTALL
DLI
→ DLI

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

COMPACT II PROCEDURE

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 806
Display shows

O.SLI SLOT
O.2SLI →O.2SLI

Press UP or DOWN key to select slot number

EXP.1 SLOT
6DLI →8DLI

Press RIGHT soft key to change previous card type

EXP.1 SLOT
8DLI →8DLI

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

MMC 806 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
n

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

816 PROCEDURE

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 806
Display shows

EXP. SLOT
NONE →NONE

Press RIGHT soft key to change previous card type

EXP. SLOT
NONE →8TRK

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

None

MMC 806 (Page 2 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 807
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

VOLUME CONTROL
3

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the volume levels to be set the for the following keyset features:
KEY TONE
SIDE TONE
HANDSET TX
MIC TX LEVEL
NOISE GUARD

NOISE THRES
ALC THRES
TX/RX THRES
TX/RX COMP

Caution
You should only change these values under the supervision of Technical Support.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
HOLD

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to clear previous entry

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 807
Display shows

VOL.CONTROL:DGP
KEY TONE VOL :1

Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor

VOL.CONTROL:DGP
KEY TONE VOL :1

Press UP or DOWN key to select feature (e.g. SIDE
TONE VOL) and press RIGHT soft key

VOL.CONTROL:DGP
SIDE TONE VOL:1

Press UP or DOWN key to select volume and press
LEFT soft key

VOL.CONTROL:DGP
SIDE TONE VOL:2

Repeat step 3 to select and change other volume levels
OR
Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:
Key tone vol
Sidetone vol
Handset tx
Mic tx level
Noise guard
Related Items:

1
1
3
3
8

Noise thres.
Alc thres.
Tx/rx thres.
Tx/rx comp.

None

MMC 807 (Page 1 of 1)

1
7
3
5

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 808

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

T1 TRUNK CODING
Not Used in the UK

MMC 808 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 809
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE
7

CII

816

408i

408

Allows the assignment of an LCD display based on the system programming language. Your
system supports some or all of the following languages:
ENGLISH
GERMAN
PORTUGAL

DANISH
DUTCH
SPANISH

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 809
Display shows

SYS.MMC LANGUAGE
ENGLISH

Press UP or DOWN to make selection and
press RIGHT soft key

SYS.MMC LANGUAGE
DANISH

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

ENGLISH

Related Items:

Multi-Language

MMC 809 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 810
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

HALT PROCESSING
3

CII

816

408i

408

Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped in either a single cabinet or
slot, or in the entire system. The procedure differs slightly between systems.
Note: You do not need to enable system programming (MMC 800) in order to run this program but you will
still require the technician’s passcode.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS
SPEAKER
ANS/RLS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to store data and advance to next MMC
Used to select ALL

DCS PROCEDURE

ACTION
1.

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 810
Display shows

HALT/PROCESSING
C:ALL S:ALL→PROC

2a.

Enter cabinet selection via dial keypad
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to advance cursor

HALT/PROCESSING
C:3
S:ALL→PROC

2b.

Press ANS/RLS to select all cabinets and all slots

HALT/PROCESSING
C:ALL S:ALL→PROC

Enter slot number via dial keypad
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to advance cursor

HALT/PROCESSING
C:3
S:5 →PROC

Enter 1 for HALT or 0 to PROC
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to enter data and return to step 2

HALT/PROCESSING
C:3
S:5 →HALT

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

MMC 810 (Page 1 of 2)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL
n

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

COMPACT II & 816 PROCEDURE

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 810
Display shows

HALT/PROCESSING
SLOT NO:ALL→PROC

Enter slot number via dial keypad (e.g. 5)
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to advance cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all slots

HALT/PROCESSING
SLOT NO:5 →PROC

Enter 1 for HALT or 0 to PROC
OR
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key to enter data and return to step 2

HALT/PROCESSING
SLOT NO:5 →HALT

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

None

MMC 810 (Page 2 of 2)

HALT/PROCESSING
SLOT NO:ALL→PROC

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 811
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

RESET SYSTEM
3

CII

816

408i

408

Provides two methods of restarting the system. The first method (CLEAR MEMORY) restarts the
system and clears all memory. The second method (RESET SYSTEM) restarts the system only. If
CLEAR MEMORY is selected, system data will return to default values.
Note: You do not need to enable system programming (MMC 800) in order to run this program but you will
still require the technician’s passcode.

WARNING: Extreme care should be taken when using this MMC
If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are dropped.
If memory is cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system
returns to default status.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right

ACTION

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 811
Display shows

SYSTEM RESTART
RESET SYSTEM?NO

Press UP or DOWN key to make selection
(RESET SYSTEM or CLEAR MEMORY)
After selection is made, press RIGHT soft key to move
cursor to YES/NO option

SYSTEM RESTART
CLEAR MEMORY?NO

Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key

SYSTEM RESTART
CLEAR MEMORY?YES

Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and press
RIGHT soft key
Warning: Selecting CLEAR MEMORY will erase all
data in the system and return default values

SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?YES

If RESET SYSTEM is selected, system will return to normal programmed status

Default Data:

None

Related Items:

None

MMC 811 (Page 1 of 1)

DCS
COMBINED PROGRAMMING MANUAL

MMC: 812
DCS

MMC PROGRAMS
NOVEMBER 2001

SELECT COUNTRY
7

CII

816

408i

408

IMPORTANT
This MMC should be run before any other programming is done to ensure
that the correct software for your country has been selected, or to change
the selection if required.
When using this MMC, the system is restarted to make the selection effective.
Note: You do not need to enable system programming (MMC 800) in order to run this program but you will
still require the technician’s passcode.

PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN
KEYPAD
SOFT KEYS

Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right

ACTION
1.

DISPLAY

Open programming and select 812
Display shows the country selected by the installer
(e.g. UK).

SELECT COUNTRY
UK

To accept this setting, go to step 4.
2.

Press UP or DOWN key to select a different country
and press RIGHT soft key

SELECT COUNTRY
DENMARK

Press UP or DOWN key to select YES or NO and press
RIGHT soft key

DEFAULTING SYSTM
ARE YOU SURE?YES

Warning: if you select YES, this will clear the
memory and restart the system
4.

Press TRSF to store and exit
OR
Press SPEAKER to store and advance to next MMC

Default Data:

NONE

Related Items:

All MMCs

MMC 812 (Page 1 of 1)

Samsung Telecoms (U.K.) Limited
Brookside Business Park, Greengate, Middleton, Manchester M24 1GS
Tel: 0161 655 1100 Fax: 0161 655 1166

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Create Date                     : 2001:10:22 12:54:51Z
Creator Tool                    : Microsoft Word
Modify Date                     : 2008:12:04 14:34:29-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:12:04 14:34:29-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : gmm
Title                           : Programming_v2_.PDF
Producer                        : Acrobat PDFWriter 4.05 for Windows
Document ID                     : uuid:64fcb6cf-5f9d-4068-a3e1-939e258005f2
Instance ID                     : uuid:d31f0c18-41fd-41cc-a790-2ccc4697b95b
Page Count                      : 276
Author                          : gmm

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Samsung Telephone Dcs 408 Users Manual Programming_v2_

DCS-408 to the manual 913553d6-cc7c-47b9-a9bb-b91db5847c6e

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation